in Mil illlllllHllMIHM II II ill I Milium mini 
 
 
 • iiiiiiiiiiiltillli l lll1tkilillllllllllllllilitllllO«>IIU<l<f">M>""^"<M'« a >'* 
 
DEI 
 
 No. (0 
 
PRINCIPLES OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR 
 
LIPPINCOTT'S LANGUAGE SERIES 
 
 Common School Series 
 PATRICK'S LESSONS IN LANGUAGE 
 
 FOR USE IN FOURTH, FIFTH, AND SIXTH GRADES 
 
 224 pages. 12mo. Postpaid, 40 cents 
 PATRICK'S LESSONS IN GRAMMAR 
 
 FOR USE IN SIXTH AND SEVENTH GRADES 
 
 232 pages. 12mo. Postpaid, 50 cents 
 
 For Ad-Vanced Grades 
 
 PATRICK'S PRINCIPLES OF GRAMMAR 
 
 FOR HIGHER CLASSES AND TEACHERS' INSTITUTES 
 
 212 pages. 12mo. Postpaid, 60 cents 
 

 
 PRINCIPLES 
 
 OF 
 
 English Grammar 
 
 WITH SUGGESTIONS ON METHOD 
 
 FOR USE IN HIGH SCHOOLS, SEMINARIES, ACADEMIES 
 
 AND NORMAL SCHOOLS 
 
 BY 
 
 J. N. PATRICK, A.M. 
 
 AUTHOR OF "LESSONS IN LANGUAGE," "LESSONS IN GRAMMAR," 
 "PSYCHOLOGY FOR TEACHERS," AND "LIGHT ON THE ROAD." 
 
 PHILADELPHIA AND LONDON 
 
 J. B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY 
 
 1903 
 
Copyright, 1903, 
 
 BY 
 
 J. B. Lippincott Company. 
 EDUCATION DES- 
 
 ELECTROTYPED AND PRINTED BY J. B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY, PHILADELPHIA, U.S.A. 
 
PREFACE 
 * 
 
 This manual is intended for use in secondary schools. 
 The study of grammar as a system cannot be understood 
 and applied by the average eighth-grade pupil. Technical 
 grammar is too abstract for pupils in the grammar grades. 
 Only those fundamental principles of grammar that every 
 one must know in order to understand the structure of the 
 sentence and to appreciate literature are presented and 
 illustrated, yet the author has not evaded or left without an 
 opinion, distinctly stated, those perplexing points which 
 often annoy a teacher. A careful examination of this book 
 will justify the following statements of its special features : 
 
 First. — It presents in the introduction a brief but com- 
 prehensive statement of the principles of our language. 
 
 Second. — It presents a concise review of the parts of 
 speech. 
 
 Third. — It presents a new, simple, and logical treatment 
 of the grammatical terms. 
 
 Fourth. — It presents a comprehensive discussion of the 
 uses of phrases and clauses, their like uses illustrated. 
 
 Fifth. — It presents a clear and logical discussion of the 
 complements and objects of verbs, their unlike uses fully 
 illustrated. 
 
 Sixth. — It presents a simple classification of verbs and 
 verb-phrases. 
 
 5 
 
 54H13 
 
6 PREFACE. 
 
 Seventh. — It presents an unusually complete illustration 
 of the uses of infinitives and participles. 
 
 Eighth. — It presents test questions and sentence-making 
 exercises, which compel the pupil to study the text, to 
 think, to construct sentences, to use his learning. 
 
 Ninth. — It presents ten common faults to be avoided in 
 construction. 
 
 Tenth. — It presents the most important rules of Syntax 
 and practically applies them. 
 
 Eleventh. — It presents models for parsing the parts of 
 speech and for the analysis of sentences. 
 
 Twelfth. — It presents a practical treatment of the prin- 
 ciples of capitalization, punctuation, and paragraphing. 
 
 Thirteenth. — It presents a valuable exercise in the 
 transformation of sentences — grammatical equivalents. 
 
 Fourteenth. — It presents a specimen exercise in the 
 proper choice of words or Faulty Diction. 
 
 Fifteenth. — It presents many suggestions on method in 
 teaching this subject. The author's long and varied ex- 
 perience as a teacher and superintendent of schools privi- 
 leges him to make suggestions in the belief that they will be 
 valuable to young teachers. 
 
 This work is not a part of a series of language texts ; it 
 is an independent book. A part of several of the exercises 
 is taken from the author's " Lessons in Grammar," the 
 advanced book of his common-school series. 
 
 J. N. P. 
 
 St. Louis, April, 1903. 
 
EXERCISE 
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 11 
 
 I. 
 
 
 22 
 
 II. 
 III. 
 
 Adjectives 
 
 . 36 
 
 IV. 
 
 Verbs. — Verb-Phrases 
 
 40 
 
 V. 
 VI. 
 
 Adverbs 
 
 50 
 63 
 
 VII. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 IX. 
 
 Prepositions. — Conjunctions. — Interjections .... 
 
 Grammatical Terms. — General View 
 
 The Sentence. — Use. — Structure 
 
 69 
 
 78 
 81 
 
 X. 
 
 Phrases 
 
 . 84 
 
 XI. 
 
 Clauses 
 
 . 87 
 
 XII. 
 
 Copula. — Complement. — Object 
 
 . 91 
 
 XIII. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 XV. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 XVII. 
 
 XVIII. 
 
 XIX 
 
 Peculiar Uses of Nouns and Adjectives , 96 
 
 Varied Uses of Words 112 
 
 The Sentence. — Subject. — Predicate. — Principal, Sub- 
 
 Tr\nsformation of Sentences 35 
 
 XX. 
 
 Capitals 
 
 . 142 
 
 XXI. 
 XXII. 
 
 
 145 
 
 . 168 
 
 XXIII. 
 
 
 190 
 
 7 
 
GRAMMAR IN ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS 
 
 "The fourth window of the soul opened in the elementary school 
 is grammar, wherein the child is made to get a glimpse of the logical 
 structure of language in which is revealed the logical structure of the 
 intellect ; he gets a power to discriminate and hold fast the distinction 
 between what is said and the form of saying it. He gets a scientific 
 glimpse of the forms or laws of all speech. He learns to separate 
 the sound, or the printed form, from the meaning which he gives to 
 the word, and he learns to see the form or law which belongs to his 
 mind and gives it a logical structure ; he discriminates verbs, nouns, 
 adjectives, adverbs, pronouns, and connectives, a kind of discrimina- 
 tion which he is not able to do at all except by introspection. The 
 child gains very rapidly in his power of introspection by his study of 
 grammar ; it is undoubtedly the hardest study that he has yet reached 
 in his course. In arithmetic he is obliged to discriminate quantity 
 from quality, and learns to think in directions of quantity alone. 
 This is a severe discipline, but it is not so difficult for him to learn as 
 the discrimination between the printed or spoken word and the kind 
 of meaning which the mind gives to the word. 
 
 "This grammatical discipline which seems useless to many people 
 in our time is one of the most useful of all the branches of study in 
 the common school ; the grammatical study opens the windows of 
 the soul looking inward and revealing the structure of the soul just 
 as outward sense and the sciences of nature reveal the structure of 
 the earth and the elements of matter. It is necessary to train the 
 power of introspection through grammar in order to enable the hu- 
 man being to discriminate what is only blind feeling and prejudice 
 from clear ideas and principles ; without which power of introspec- 
 tion motives cannot be purified, and especially the ethical and the 
 moral cannot be discriminated from mere instinct and selfish im- 
 pulse." — Dr. William T. Harris. 
 
 9 
 
" Instruction without practice cannot impart skill, and 
 hence cannot make an artist. The old-time attempt to teach 
 the art of using good English, by means of technical gram- 
 mar, is an illustration of this error. This attempt was based 
 on the false notion that skill in speech and writing is a 
 necessary result of a knowledge of the rules of language — 
 an error still too common in American schools, and especially 
 in elementary schools, whose pupils are too young to appre- 
 hend or apply abstract principles in any art." — E. E. White. 
 
 10 
 

 
 Principles of English Grammar 
 
 Introduction, 
 
 Grammar is the science which treats of the general 
 principles of language. English grammar is the science 
 which treats of the principles of the English language. 
 
 In the grades below the high school a pupil should learn 
 at least the four most important principles of elementary 
 grammar, — viz., (1) He should learn the logical method by 
 which words are classed as parts of speech. (2) He 
 should learn the simple English system of inflection. (3) 
 He should learn how to apply the most important rules 
 of syntax. (4) He should learn to construct the several 
 kinds of sentences. These four fundamental essentials can 
 be learned by the average pupil in the common school 
 grades. Unfortunately many pupils do not learn them 
 there or elsewhere. 
 
 Many teachers are content to hear their pupils recite 
 
 grammatical definitions, analyze sentences by memorized 
 
 formulae, and parse words by ear. Why is it that many 
 
 graduates of high schools cannot correctly spell the words 
 
 used in an ordinary business letter ? Why is it that a 
 
 large majority of the graduates of our commercial schools 
 
 cannot correctly spell, capitalize, punctuate, and divide into 
 
 paragraphs a dictated letter ? It is because they were not 
 
 methodically and persistently drilled in word-study and 
 
 sentence-making in the grammar and high school grades. 
 
 11 
 
12 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Instruction in word study, practice in composing, and in 
 applying the most important rules of syntax require daily 
 drills in the use of every-day English. It is a teachers 
 duty to know that his pupils are thoroughly grounded in 
 the fundamental principles of English grammar. The mas- 
 tery of the essential facts of a science carries with it the 
 correct use of much unimportant detail. One learns to 
 use language correctly only by a reflective use of it in the 
 expression of his own thoughts. One learns to appreciate 
 good literature in only one way, — by studying good litera- 
 ture. Inspiration is born of inspiration. More inspiration 
 can be gained from the study of famous authors than 
 by criticising the faults of poor ones. 
 
Inflection. 
 
 Inflection. — The change made in the form of a word, 
 either to show changes of its own meaning or to adapt it to 
 be used with other words, is called its inflection. 
 
 Examples. — By changing a vowel in the singular noun 
 man we make the plural noun men. By adding s to man 
 we make the singular possessive man's; by adding s to 
 men we make the plural possessive men's. From run we 
 may make runs, ran, running. By adding s to horse we 
 make horses, merely a different form of horse. It should 
 be clear that inflectional changes do not make new words, 
 but other forms of words. The inflection of a noun is 
 called its declension ; the inflection of a verb, its conjugation. 
 
 Our language is almost inflectionless. The pupil should 
 master what little there is of inflection before he enters the 
 high school. He should be put through a severe course 
 of training in the use of the important inflections ; he 
 should be required to illustrate his knowledge of inflection 
 in original sentences. 
 
 Nouns. — The noun has only two case-forms, the nomi- 
 native and the possessive. The nominative, the objective, 
 and the independent case-forms are alike. If we place the 
 possessive form of nouns with the limiting adjectives, the 
 noun has only one case-form, the nominative. The noun 
 varies for case only to denote possession. 
 
 13 
 
14 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Pronouns. — Personal pronouns have fixed forms for 
 different uses, number-forms, person-forms, gender-forms, 
 and case-forms. These forms should be mastered and 
 their uses exhibited in original sentences. 
 
 Verbs. — The changes in the form of the verb to corre- 
 spond to changes in its subject are very limited. With the 
 exception of the verb to be in the indicative mode, present 
 and past tenses, singular number, there are but few changes 
 in the form of the English verb to denote person, number, 
 tense, mode, or voice. 
 
 Adjectives. — Most adjectives are inflected to show dif- 
 ferences of degree. With the exception of two adjectives, 
 this and that, the adjective keeps the same form, whether 
 joined to a singular or to a plural noun. This and that 
 have the plurals these and those. 
 
 Adverbs. — Many adverbs, especially those denoting 
 manner, admit of comparison, and are compared like 
 adjectives. 
 
 The preposition, the conjunction, and the interjection have 
 no variation of form ; they are called the uninflected parts 
 of speech, or invariables. 
 
 From the foregoing brief review of inflection it is seen 
 that but few forms are found in English, and that these are 
 easily learned as a part of the content of the expression. 
 English is primarily a logical language and secondarily a 
 formal language. Logic and position determine relations ; 
 hence the disciplinary value of the study. 
 
 The structure of the English sentence is very simple. 
 The kind of thought to be expressed determines the struc- 
 ture of the sentence that expresses it. A single, simple 
 
INFLECTION. 15 
 
 thought is expressed by a simple sentence ; a complex 
 thought by a complex sentence ; consecutive coordinate 
 thought by a compound sentence. The kind of sentence 
 describes the mental state. If the writer desires to convey 
 to the reader a fact or a truth, he uses the declarative form 
 of the sentence ; if he wishes to elicit information, he uses 
 the interrogative form of the sentence ; if he wishes the 
 reader to do something, he uses the imperative form of the 
 sentence ; if he wishes to express strong feeling or emo- 
 tion, he uses the exclamatory form of the sentence. 
 Pope's familiar couplet, — 
 
 ' ' True ease in writing comes from art not chance, 
 As those move easiest who have learned to dance," 
 
 is a lecture on method in teaching English. A pupil's 
 greatest need is the ability to give clear expression to his 
 learning. This power he can acquire in only one way, — 
 by giving expression to his thoughts orally and with a pen. 
 Many a bright and deserving young man has failed to secure 
 a desirable position because of the mistakes in his letter of 
 application. The average eighth-grade pupil cannot write 
 a correctly and concisely worded letter, or a clean, strong 
 composition on the most familiar subject. He has not 
 learned how to give expression to his impressions. He 
 needs methodical training in sentence-building, in copying, 
 in reproduction, and in writing compositions on familiar 
 subjects. " Write, write, write, there is no way to learn to 
 write except by writing," said Emerson, the wisest of his 
 century. The pupil should be led to see that the frequent 
 use of the pen under the careful editorial guidance of a 
 competent teacher is the only true method of disclosing 
 and removing defects which otherwise might never be 
 
16 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 brought to his knowledge. No other method of teaching 
 English will make the correct forms of language familiar. 
 
 If more of the time now spent in many schools in 
 reciting the facts of grammar were spent in expressing 
 original thought, it would not be long until the average 
 high school graduate could write a correct application for a 
 situation or express in ten words a ten-word message. He 
 cannot do it now, although he has studied text-book gram- 
 mar for years. He has declined nouns and pronouns, con- 
 jugated verbs, compared adjectives and adverbs, imprisoned 
 sentences in diagrams, but still he cannot correctly describe 
 an event nor state a fact in clean, concise English. Parsing 
 and analysis may help indirectly ; the former by way of 
 fixing what' little there is of inflection, the latter by way of 
 exhibiting the structure of sentences. Accuracy in the use 
 of language is acquired through the reflective use of words 
 in the expression of original thought and by the imitation 
 of excellent models, not by rules and theory. Clearness 
 in speaking and in writing is acquired only by thinking and 
 writing. Threescore and ten years spent in analyzing sen- 
 tences and parsing words would not materially increase the 
 pupil's vocabulary or develop a love for literature. 
 
 It matters not to the pupil whether we have three or 
 four modes, if he uses the language clearly and forcibly. 
 In the study of language, especially the English, theory 
 without practice has little or no value. The ability to 
 quote a grammar from the title-page to the end would in 
 no way improve the speech of the unthinking. The mere 
 recitation of grammatical facts will no more make correct 
 speakers and writers than the mere recitation of moral 
 maxims will make good citizens. Pupils should learn to 
 use good English in the schools. By good English is meant 
 
INFLECTION. 17 
 
 the English used by the first writers, by the cultivated and 
 refined. It is not governed by a book of arbitrary rules. 
 No power yet exerted has been able to establish a fixed 
 and immovable standard of written English. The style of 
 written and spoken English varies. Language is an instru- 
 ment, a tool, and changes as the users of it change. 
 
 Composing-. — Experience proves that a pupil learns to 
 express his thoughts in only one way, — by much practice 
 in expressing them. Expression is the soul of mental life. 
 " Composing, 1 ' says L. H. Jones, the distinguished superin- 
 tendent of the Cleveland, Ohio, schools, " is one of the most 
 important agencies in developing power to think and in a 
 mastery of expression. It is one of the greatest instrumen- 
 talities in the acquisition of knowledge ; because to write 
 a thoroughly good composition on any subject requires 
 a comprehensive view of it as a whole, a knowledge of detail, 
 and a discriminative appreciation of the essentials." 
 
 Dr. E. E. White says, — 
 
 1 ' The stupid custom of teaching formal analysis and parsing before 
 practical composition richly deserves the ridicule now heaped upon 
 it ; but is there not evidence of a tendency to the opposite extreme? 
 It now looks as if there would soon be an opportunity to laugh at the 
 equally futile attempt to teach the art of correct speech by haphazard, 
 cut-feed language lessons, some of which are about as mechanical as 
 the filling of a basket with chips, and result in about the same kind 
 of skill. The function of language is to express thought, and no exer- 
 cise in the use of language can impart much skill that does not begin 
 with the awakening of thought and end with its correct expression. ' ' 
 
 It is encouraging to believe that the silly picture story- 
 books used in the fourth, fifth, and sixth grades have only a 
 
 little longer to live — to live by sufferance. 
 
 2 
 
18 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Clearness and conciseness of expression are most surely 
 attained through the use of the pen in the expression of 
 original thought. Frequent exercises in writing short com- 
 positions on familiar subjects from outlines is a valuable 
 exercise, and should extend through the grammar grades. 
 A pupil should never be required to write on a subject that 
 he does not know something about, or about which he 
 cannot get information from the library. Require him to 
 rewrite the composition until each of the principal points is 
 brought out and properly related. The knowledge which 
 a pupil acquires in school will be of little value if he be 
 unable to express what he knows clearly, concisely, and 
 forcibly. The art of expression is acquired by only a few, 
 and by them only by much practice in formal expression, 
 oral and written. 
 
 Criticism. — The nature and extent of the criticism must 
 depend on the age of the pupil and the grade of work that 
 he is doing. With pupils in the first five grades, the criti- 
 cism should not extend at first beyond the faults of the 
 individual sentence. Until the pupil can properly construct 
 a sentence, over-criticism would discourage him. Require 
 the pupil to express the same thought in as many different 
 ways as he can invent. Write on the blackboard the indi- 
 vidual sentences that exhibit the most flagrant violations of 
 the laws of good English. Discuss and correct the faulty 
 sentences in class recitation. 
 
 School children are usually in a healthy state, morally 
 and intellectually. They are generally optimistic in their 
 views of life. A word of encouragement to the average 
 pupil is worth more to him in his struggles to become than a 
 volume of pessimistic cant about the natural sinfulness and 
 
INFLECTION. 19 
 
 perverseness of his nature. Train him to recognize the 
 responsibilities of life, but do not close every school exer- 
 cise with a pointless moral lecture. Revision by the pupil 
 is the most helpful criticism. Only the most ludicrous mis- 
 takes should be criticised by the teacher. Over-criticism 
 or unnecessary censure discourages learners, whether in 
 the grades or in the high school. 
 
 False Syntax. — An occasional exercise in correcting 
 faulty forms of expression is valuable, notwithstanding the 
 fashionable cry, " No false syntax." The correct form 
 should be substituted by the pupil for the incorrect one, 
 and the reason given for the change. A knowledge of syn- 
 tactical rules will assist the learner in dislodging incorrect 
 forms of expression and in substituting correct ones. The 
 facts of grammar should aid him in undoing habit. 
 
 Technical Grammar. — A word in regard to the study 
 of technical grammar in the grammar grades. It is self- 
 evident that until a pupil can think intelligently, text-book 
 rules have little or no meaning to him. A pupil may quote 
 a text-book on grammar from the title-page to the end and 
 not be able to write a clean and concise one-page letter. 
 Ample evidence that the statement is true is on file in the 
 office of every county superintendent in the United States. 
 Experience proves that the mere recitation of grammatical 
 rules does not develop thought-power, cultivate the art of 
 expression, or a love for good literature. Teacher and 
 pupil should ever bear in mind the general truth, that use 
 gives still greater use. This universal and immutable fact 
 is the essence of pedagogics. 
 
 In teaching English grammar the teacher should ever 
 bear in mind three important facts : 
 
20 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 First. That grammar is not an exact science. All agree 
 that English grammar is a systematic description of the 
 essential principles of the English language. There is, 
 however, a diversity of opinion in regard to the essentials. 
 
 Second. That in English the meaning depends upon the 
 arrangement of the grammatical terms. Ambiguity and 
 obscurity result more frequently from disregard or igno- 
 rance of the principles of order than from a poor choice 
 of words. 
 
 Third. That time spent in the schoolroom, especially 
 in the grades below the high school, in discussing technical 
 grammatical distinctions is injudiciously spent. An un- 
 necessary exhibition of much wisdom on the part of an 
 author or teacher confuses pupils. Some of the disadvan- 
 tages of knowing much is often seen in the schoolroom. 
 
 But I must not be misunderstood. Conscious knowl- 
 edge of the essentials of a subject is absolutely necessary 
 in order to teach it properly. Enthusiasm on the part of 
 the teacher is born of a conscious knowledge of the sub- 
 ject in hand, emphasized by a good method in teaching it. 
 
 Disciplinary Value. — I cannot close these introductory 
 pages without saying a word in advocacy of the discipli- 
 nary value of a methodical and persistent study of English 
 in all grades of the schools. Until recently the disciplinary 
 value of the study of English was questioned by a large 
 majority of the professional teachers. This fact is, per- 
 haps, the reason why the study is not now receiving the 
 attention in the common schools that it so clearly deserves. 
 Strange, indeed, it is that the disciplinary value of the study 
 of a language which introduces the pupil to the finest body 
 of literature in the world was ever questioned by teachers 
 
INFLECTION. 21 
 
 of average intelligence. English is comparatively an unin- 
 fected language. In this respect it has a decided advan- 
 tage over the highly inflected languages in the fact that it 
 requires less of formalism and cramming than they require. 
 English is primarily a logical language, and secondarily a 
 formal language. Logic and position determine relations ; 
 hence the disciplinary value of the study. In English 
 memory is subordinated to reason. If the language is 
 taught as a logical language, the pupil will not only learn 
 to use it correctly, but understandingly. The small num- 
 ber of syntactical forms in English compared to those in 
 the highly inflected languages shows the value of English 
 as a means of training over the so-called classical languages. 
 English is the most analytical of languages. Its sentence 
 structure is logical, not formal. The study of the highly 
 inflected languages has to do chiefly with words ; the study 
 of English, with grammatical terms as wholes. Parsing 
 has to do with words as parts of speech ; logical or thought 
 analysis, with the grammatical terms as units. With this 
 form of language-study, the inquiring pupil is delighted. 
 The study of English for training will yet take its place along 
 with mathematics and science. English offers the only 
 practical linguistic training for the mass of our people. 
 
EXERCISE I. 
 Nouns. 
 
 NOTES. — I. It is a -well-established fact that spir- 
 ited, methodical reviews perfect impressions. It is 
 also a well-established fact that there is no other 
 school exercise that is as worthless as a timid, 
 pulseless review. The value of a review exercise, 
 therefore, depends almost wholly upon the method 
 of the teacher. Method either inspires or stupefies. 
 
 II. A brief review of the parts of speech will 
 prove both interesting and profitable to students in 
 high schools, also to young teachers. A clear idea 
 of the logical classification of the words of our 
 language is first among the important principles of 
 English grammar. 
 
 A noun is the name of anything. The word noun as 
 used in this exercise denotes all objects, material and 
 immaterial, visible and invisible ; as, John, man, St. Louis, 
 dog, water, air, sun, goodness, virtue, charity, whiteness, army, 
 flock, school, herd. It is not the thing named, but the name 
 of the thing we call a noun. The word noun means name. 
 Whenever a letter, sl word, or a symbol of any kind is spoken 
 of as an object, the name of the object is a noun ; as, the 
 letter A is the first letter of the English alphabet ; the sign 
 X when placed between two numbers means that the first 
 is to be multiplied by the second. 
 
 Kinds of Nouns. — There are four principal kinds of 
 
 nouns, — common nouns, proper nouns, collective nouns, 
 
 and abstract nouns. 
 22 
 
NOUNS. 23 
 
 NOTE. — Verbal nouns, nouns derived from verbs, 
 "will be discussed in a later exercise. 
 
 A common noun is a name that applies to every indi- 
 vidual of a class of objects ; as, boy, girl, chair, river, town. 
 
 A proper noun is the name of an individual object ; as, 
 St. Louis, Ralph Waldo Emerson, Rocky Mountains, Missis- 
 sippi River, Philadelphia. 
 
 A collective noun is one that, in the singular form, 
 denotes more than one object; as, flock, army, class, com- 
 mittee, congregation. 
 
 An abstract noun is one that denotes a quality consid- 
 ered apart from the object to which it belongs ; as, pity, 
 mercy, beauty, goodness, truth. 
 
 Verbal Nouns. — The names of actions, such as to love, to 
 walk, to dance, loving, walking, dancing, are called verbal 
 nouns, — verbals. 
 
 Abstract nouns are formed from nouns, adjectives, and 
 verbs. From the common noun peer, we form peerage ; 
 from child, childhood ; from master, mastery. From the 
 adjective good, goodness ; from wise, wisdom ; from red, 
 redness ; from prudent, prudence. From the verb protect, 
 protection ; from move, motion ; from reflect, reflection. 
 
 To nouns belong person, number, gender, and case. 
 
 Person is that property of a noun or a pronoun which 
 shows the relation of the speaker to the object spoken of. 
 There are three persons, ih.Q first, the second, and the third. 
 The first person denotes the speaker ; the second, the per- 
 son spoken to ; the third, the person spoken of. 
 
24 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Number is that form of a noun or a pronoun which dis- 
 tinguishes one object from more than one. There are two 
 number-forms, — the singular number is used when only 
 one thing is meant, and the plural number is used when 
 more than one thing is meant. 
 
 Gender is a distinction of nouns in regard to sex. There 
 are two genders, the masculine gender and the feminine 
 gender. Names of the male sex are nouns of the mascu- 
 line gender ; names of the female sex are nouns of the 
 feminine gender. 
 
 Case denotes the relation of a noun or a pronoun to 
 other words in a sentence. There are four cases, the 
 nominative, the objective, the possessive, and the inde- 
 pendent. A noun used as the subject of a verb is in the 
 nominative case ; a noun used as the object of a verb, a 
 participle, a preposition, or an infinitive, is in the objective 
 case ; a noun used to denote possession is in the posses- 
 sive case ; a noun used to compel attention is in the inde- 
 pendent case ; that is, it is not part of the sentence with 
 which it stands, therefore it is grammatically independent. 
 The noun has only two case-forms, the nominative and 
 the possessive. 
 
 Parsing. 
 
 Parsing a word is giving a complete description of it 
 as it is used in the sentence. 
 
 TO THE TEACHER : Drills in parsing should be 
 more than formal recitations. They should train 
 pupils in the correct and economic use of ■words. 
 The use of language, good or bad, is a growth. 
 Teachers should ever be on the alert in regard to 
 the language used by their pupils in the recitation. 
 
NOUNS. 25 
 
 Accuracy of expression depends upon clearness 
 of thought. The time to correct a pupil's speech is 
 "when it needs correcting. The only cure for the 
 use of bad English is revision until the incorrect 
 statement or illustration is changed into a clean, 
 concise statement. Teachers should constantly 
 bear in mind the fact that one lesson in the reflective 
 use of words in the expression of original thought 
 is worth to the pupil many text-book recitations of 
 grama tical facts. 
 
 In parsing a noun tell : 
 
 1. The class to which it belongs. 
 
 2. The person, gender (if a gender noun), number, case. 
 
 3. The use in the sentence. 
 
 Parse the nouns in the following sentences : 
 
 1. The proper rest for man is change of occupation. 
 
 2. It was Pentecost, the feast of gladness. 
 
 3. Man became a living soul. 
 
 4. Many people live in St. Louis, the metropolis of the West. 
 
 5. The jury gave their verdict. 
 
 6. The congregation adjourned for one week. 
 
 7. His bravery was applauded. 
 
 8. Truth, crushed to earth, will rise again. 
 
 9. To love is to live. 
 
 10. Loving is living. 
 
 11. Every why has a wherefore. 
 
 12. Justice should be tempered with mercy. 
 
 13. John, come to me. 
 
 14. The congregation came in a body. 
 
 15. " Land of the beautiful and brave, 
 
 The freeman's, the martyr's grave, 
 
 The nursery of giant men, 
 
 Whose deeds are linked with every glen ! 
 
 My own green land forever." 
 
 — Whittier. 
 
26 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Test Questions. 
 
 1. What is a noun ? Name one of each of the principal 
 kinds of nouns. 
 
 2. In what particular respect does a common noun differ 
 from a proper noun ? 
 
 3. In what particular respect does an abstract noun differ 
 from a collective noun ? 
 
 4. Show that abstract nouns may be derived from com- 
 mon nouns, from adjectives, and from verbs. 
 
 5. What four properties belong to nouns ? 
 
 6. What is meant by person as the word is used in 
 grammar ? How many persons are there ? 
 
 7. What is meant by number as used in grammar ? How 
 many numbers are there ? 
 
 8. What is meant by gender as used in grammar ? How 
 many genders are there ? 
 
 9. What is meant by the phrase, a gender noun f 
 
 10. What is meant by case as used in grammar ? How 
 many cases have nouns ? 
 
 11. How many case-forms have nouns? Which case- 
 forms are alike ? Illustrate. 
 
EXERCISE II. 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 Personal, Relative, Adjective, Interrogative. 
 
 TO THE TEACHER : Only the most important 
 facts in regard to the uses of pronouns are given in 
 this exercise. The pupil should be required to use 
 the facts in original illustrative sentences until he 
 knows how to use them. He should be required to 
 decline each pronoun, then use it orally in a sen- 
 tence. A mere memory recitation of the text-book 
 definitions and illustrations does not usually give 
 an average pupil a clear idea of the form and use of 
 this substitute part of speech. 
 
 Personal Pronouns. 
 
 A pronoun is a word that stands for a noun. 
 
 Pronouns are divided into three principal classes, — per- 
 sonal, relative, and adjective. 
 
 A personal pronoun is one that stands for a noun, and 
 shows by its form whether it is of the first, the second, or 
 the third person. 
 
 The simple personal pronouns are /, thou, you, he, she, it. 
 
 Compound Personal Pronouns. 
 
 Pronouns formed by adding self or selves to certain 
 simple personal pronouns, as, myself, himself, herself, your- 
 self, itself, themselves, yourselves, ourselves, are called com- 
 pound personal pronouns. 
 
 27 
 
28 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Declensions of Personal Pronouns. 
 
 
 Nominative. 
 
 Possessive. 
 
 Objective. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 I 
 
 my or mine 
 
 me 
 
 Plural. 
 
 we 
 
 our or ours 
 
 us 
 
 Singular. 
 
 thou 
 
 thy or thine 
 
 thee 
 
 Plural. 
 
 you 
 
 your or yours 
 
 you 
 
 Singular. 
 
 he 
 
 his 
 
 him 
 
 Plural. 
 
 they 
 
 their or theirs 
 
 them 
 
 Singular. 
 
 she 
 
 her or hers 
 
 her 
 
 Plural. 
 
 they 
 
 their or theirs 
 
 them 
 
 Singular. 
 
 it 
 
 its 
 
 it 
 
 Plural. 
 
 they 
 
 their or theirs 
 
 them 
 
 Special Uses of It. 
 
 It has a number of special uses. It is a very conve- 
 nient little word on account of its representative character. 
 The most important of its special uses are the following : 
 
 1. It is very often used as the grammatical subject, in- 
 stead of the phrase or clause which is the real, or logical 
 subject and which follows the verb ; as, It is a duty to love 
 humanity. It is doubtful whether I will go. It is easy to 
 live after the worlds opinion. 
 
 2. It is often used in a vague sense as the subject of 
 verbs descriptive of the weather ; as, It rains. It is dark. 
 It is cloudy. It thunders. It snows. 
 
 3. It is used as a subject to represent a noun or a pro- 
 noun as an attribute of any number, gender, or person ; as, 
 It is I. It is they. It is she. It is James. It is you. 
 
 4. It is sometimes used as the impersonal object of a 
 verb ; as, I made up my mind to foot it. He lorded it over 
 his servants. 
 
PRONOUNS. 29 
 
 Relative Pronouns. 
 
 A relative pronoun is one used to represent a preceding 
 noun or pronoun, called the antecedent, and to connect 
 with it a clause. 1. The pupil who gives attention will 
 learn. 2. He that getteth wisdom loveth his own soul. 3. 
 I have many things which I wish to tell you. 
 
 Simple Relative Pronouns. 
 
 The simple relative pronouns are who, which, that, as. 
 
 Who is used to represent persons ; which to represent 
 things ; that and as to represent both persons and things. 
 
 The antecedent of a relative pronoun is the word, phrase, 
 or clause for which the pronoun stands. It is the leading 
 term of relation, the relative clause being the subsequent 
 term. The antecedent of a pronoun may be a phrase or a 
 clause; as, He did not come, which I greatly regret. His 
 love extends from the richest to the poorest, which in- 
 cludes all. 
 
 NOTE. — A relative pronoun has both a connec- 
 tive and. a substantive value at the same time. 
 That is, it does the work of two parts of speech. 
 
 We will now briefly discuss the relative pronouns. 
 
 Who. Who with its possessive whose is both singular 
 and plural. It refers usually to living beings, sometimes to 
 things ; as, The city whose towers he saw in the distance is 
 St. Louis. 
 
 Which. Which refers only to things. It is not in- 
 flected. 
 
30 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 What is equivalent to that which ; as, What I saw I shall 
 not tell you = that which I saw I shall not tell you = I shall 
 not tell you that which I saw. 
 
 That. That refers to either persons or things. It is a 
 general relative, and is not inflected. It is usually restric- 
 tive, limiting the meaning of its antecedent in much the 
 same manner as an adjective would ; as, He that I loved is 
 dead. The clause introduced by that limits or restricts the 
 antecedent He. 
 
 As. As when it follows such is a relative pronoun ; as, 
 Such as I have, give I unto thee. I love such as (those 
 who) love me. 
 
 Compound Relative Pronouns. 
 
 The compound relative pronouns are what, whatever, 
 whatsoever, whoever, whosoever, whichever, and whichsoever. 
 These are formed from the simple relatives by adding the 
 adverbs, ever, so, soever. 
 
 What does not usually have an antecedent actually ex- 
 pressed in the sentence. It contains within itself both 
 antecedent and relative, being equivalent to that which ; as, 
 What (that which) you say is true. I saw what (that 
 ivhich) he was doing. 
 
 The relative and interrogative pronouns are declined as 
 follows : 
 
 
 Sing, and Plu. 
 
 Sing, and Plu 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Who, 
 
 Which, 
 
 Pos. 
 
 Whose, 
 
 Whose, 
 
 Obj. 
 
 Whom. 
 
 Which. 
 
PRONOUNS. 31 
 
 That and what have no variation. Whoever and whoso- 
 ever are declined like who. 
 
 NOTE. — The misuse of the relative pronouns who, 
 which, and that is seen in almost every newspaper 
 editorial and magazine article. The distinction be- 
 tween restrictive and parenthetical clauses is so 
 commonly ignored that it has almost lost its force. 
 The distinction, however, exists and has a positive 
 value. When either which or who is used to introduce 
 a relative clause, the clause is parenthetical ; tnat 
 is, it can be cut off without destroying the sense. 
 Example : " Mr. Browne, who was present at the 
 meeting, took an active part in opposing the meas- 
 ure." WIio in the foregoing sentence introduces a 
 parenthetical clause, a clause that does not restrict. 
 The restrictive force of that may be seen in the fol- 
 lowing sentence : " He was the only one that could 
 attend the meeting." That is the only relative that 
 can be properly used in this sentence, because the 
 significance of the independent sentence depends 
 upon the restrictive force of the clause following 
 the word one. Again, the incorrect use of which is 
 found in the following sentence: "Jones took ad- 
 vantage of the interim to present the records which 
 he desired to introduce." As particular, special 
 records are referred to, the clause following records 
 should be introduced by that; it should be restric- 
 tive. In the following sentence the difference be- 
 tween the proper uses of which and that is clearly 
 illustrated : " Mr. Jones took advantage of the in- 
 terim, which was short, to present the records that he 
 desired to introduce." 
 
 A relative word may represent a dependent clause ; as, 
 She has been gone all morning, no one knows where 
 (where she has been gone). One of you must go away. I 
 do not know which (which one must go away). 
 
32 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Adjective Pronouns. 
 
 Adjectives that are used in the place of the nouns which 
 they limit are called adjective pronouns. They represent 
 nouns understood; as, 1. Few attended the lecture. 2. 
 Some went away hungry. 
 
 Interrogative Pronouns. 
 
 An interrogative pronoun is one used to ask a ques- 
 tion ; as, 1. Who is that? 2. Which one do you want? 
 3. What does the man mean ? 
 
 In each of the following sentences, choose the proper 
 pronoun : 
 
 1. I would act the same part if I were (he) (him). 
 
 2. They believe it is (I) (me). 
 
 3. They believe it to be (I) (me). 
 
 4. (Who) (whom) do you think it is ? 
 
 5. (Who) (whom) do you suppose it to be ? 
 
 6. No one but (he) (him) should be about the king. 
 
 7. It could not have been (she) (her). 
 
 8. (Who) (whom) did you say you met this morning ? 
 
 9. I saw the man (who) (whom) they thought was dead. 
 
 10. I saw the man (who) (whom) they thought to be dead. 
 
 11. It is not for such as (we) (us) to sit with rulers. 
 
 12. (Who) (whom) do men say that I am ? 
 
 13. Tell me (who) (whom) you are looking for. 
 
 14. (Who) (whom) do they think him to be ? 
 
 15. We do not know (who) (whom) we serve. 
 
 16. I do not know (who) (whom) they serve. 
 
 17. (Who) (whom) did you say was at the concert? 
 
 18. (They) (them) that honor me I will honor. 
 
 19. Let (she) (her) and (I) (me) go. 
 
 20. (Who) (whom) do they think he is ? 
 
 21. Do you know (he) (him) (who) (whom) owns the house ? 
 
PRONOUNS. 33 
 
 22. I saw (he) (him) (who) (whom) you spoke to. 
 
 23. (Who) (whom) the court favors is safe. 
 
 24. Will you fight those (who) (whom) you know are right ? 
 
 25. Is James as old as (I) (me) ? 
 
 Parsing. 
 
 In parsing a pronoun, tell : 
 
 1. The class to which it belongs. 
 
 2. The antecedent. 
 
 3. The declension, if it is inflected. 
 
 4. The person, gender (if it is a personal pronoun of 
 
 the third person), number, and case. 
 
 5. The use in the sentence. 
 
 Parse the pronouns in the following sentences : 
 
 1. I shall go to see him to-morrow. 
 
 2. She met her brother at the hotel. 
 
 3. You see that he obeys cheerfully. 
 
 4. We respect him. 
 
 5. He refused what was offered him. 
 
 MODEL.— What is a compound relative pronoun. 
 It is equivalent to that ivhich, that being the antecedent 
 part and which the relative. That may be parsed as 
 an adjective pronoun used as a noun, object of the 
 verb refused. Which is a simple relative, subject of 
 the verb offered. 
 
 6. You see what becomes of disobedience. 
 
 7. The fur, which warms a monarch, warmed a bear. 
 
 8. What is right must be done. 
 
 9. We respect those who respect themselves. 
 
 10. Every one reaps what he sows. 
 
 11. He that has patience can usually have what he needs. 
 
 12. Ye are living poems. 
 
 3 
 
34 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 13. The boy, whom you sent on an errand, has returned. 
 
 14. Are you the one for whom I asked ? 
 
 15. Whoever seeks wisdom shall find it. 
 
 MODEL. — Whoever is a compound relative pro- 
 noun. It is equivalent to he who, he being the ante- 
 cedent part and who the relative. He may be parsed 
 as a personal pronoun, subject of the verb will find. 
 Who may be parsed as a simple relative, subject of 
 the verb seeks. 
 
 16. Whoever did it ought to be ashamed. 
 
 17. He will give you whichever you want. 
 
 18. Many will go to the fair ; only a few will remain at home. 
 
 19. I used some and kept some for a friend of mine. 
 
 20. I tell thee thou art defied. 
 
 21. Man cannot conceal what God would reveal. 
 
 22. They whom the gods love die young. 
 
 23. Who steals my purse steals trash. 
 
 24. Take whichever you want. 
 
 25. These are the men some of whom visited us yesterday. 
 
 26. That is the same man that we met before. 
 
 Test Questions.— Sentence-Making. 
 
 1. Into how many classes are pronouns divided ? 
 
 2. What is a simple personal pronoun ? Name them. 
 
 3. How are the compound personal pronouns formed ? 
 Give three examples. 
 
 4. What four forms have personal pronouns ? Name 
 them. 
 
 5. How many case-forms have nouns ? Name them. 
 
 6. What is a relative pronoun ? Name the simple 
 relatives. 
 
 7. Why are the relative pronouns so called ? 
 
PRONOUNS. 35 
 
 8. What is a compound relative pronoun ? Name 
 the compound relative pronouns and show how each is 
 formed. 
 
 9. What is an adjective pronoun ? Name five. 
 
 10. Why are adjective pronouns so called ? 
 
 11. What is an interrogative pronoun? Name and use 
 them in sentences. 
 
 12. In each of four sentences, use a different simple 
 relative pronoun and point out the antecedent term of 
 relation. 
 
 13. In an original sentence, show that the antecedent of 
 a relative pronoun may be a phrase. 
 
 14. In an original sentence, show that the antecedent of 
 a relative pronoun may be a clause. 
 
 15. In each of five sentences, use a different adjective 
 pronoun and show that each pronoun is capable of a 
 double use. 
 
EXERCISE III. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 An adjective is a word used to limit or qualify the 
 meaning of a noun. 
 
 Adjectives are divided into two principal classes, — limit- 
 ing and qualifying. 
 
 A limiting adjective is one used to define or restrict 
 the meaning of a noun without expressing any of its quali- 
 ties ; as, this pen ; many men ; the house ; five books. 
 
 NOTE. — The limiting adjectives, a, an, and the, are 
 sometimes called articles. The further subdivision 
 of limiting adjectives is more bookish than useful. 
 
 A qualifying adjective is one that limits the application 
 of a noun by denoting some quality or property of the 
 noun ; as, a good man ; a beautiful child ; a yellow flower ; 
 a studious pupil ; a running horse ; a roaring sea. 
 
 Adjectives are compared to denote different degrees of 
 quality. There are three degrees of quality, — the positive, 
 the comparative, the superlative. 
 
 The positive degree expresses a quality without com- 
 parison ; as, He is a righteous man. Thursday was a 
 pleasant day. 
 
 The comparative degree expresses a higher or a lower 
 quality than the positive ; as, The sun is larger than the 
 moon. The march was less difficult by night than by day. 
 
 The comparative degree implies a comparison of only 
 two objects. 
 
 36 
 
ADJECTIVES. 
 
 37 
 
 The comparative degree of most monosyllables is regu- 
 larly formed by suffixing r or er to the simple adjective, or 
 positive degree, and the superlative by suffixing st or est 
 to the positive ; as, wise, wiser, wisest ; brave, braver, 
 bravest ; strong, stronger, strongest ; bold, bolder, boldest. 
 
 The superlative degree expresses the highest or the 
 lowest quality ; as, The dog is the most faithful of animals. 
 The miser is the least esteemed of men. 
 
 The superlative degree implies a comparison of more 
 than two objects. 
 
 The comparative degree of most adjectives of more than 
 one syllable (sometimes of only one) is formed by prefixing 
 more or less, and the superlative by prefixing most or least, 
 to the positive ; as, industrious, more industrious, most 
 industrious ; beautiful, less beautiful, least beautiful. 
 
 An adjective of two syllables is compared regularly, 
 when the terminations can be added to it without making 
 an awkward word ; as, pretty, prettier, prettiest ; noble, 
 nobler, noblest. 
 
 Some adjectives form their comparatives and superla- 
 tives irregularly ; as, 
 
 Positive. 
 good ) 
 well I 
 
 Comparative. 
 better 
 
 Superlative. 
 best 
 
 bad ^ 
 
 
 
 evil [ 
 
 worse 
 
 worst 
 
 ill J 
 
 
 
 many ^ 
 much { 
 
 more 
 
 most 
 
 far 
 
 farther or further 
 
 farthest or furthest 
 
 late 
 
 later or latter 
 
 latest or last 
 
 old 
 
 older or elder 
 
 oldest or eldest 
 
38 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Compare the following adjectives : 
 
 Lazy, ugly, red, slim, thin, sad, glad, snug, frail, deep, green, 
 black, great, proud, serene, true, remote, able, happy, balmy, cruel, 
 prudent, sensible, dangerous, virtuous, ancient, learned, honorable, 
 famous, polite, tender, expensive, heavy, lucky. 
 
 Adjectives derived from verbs are called participial adjec- 
 tives. Adjectives derived from proper nouns are called 
 proper adjectives. What and which when used to ask 
 questions are called interrogative adjectives. The only 
 adjectives that have a plural form are this and that; plural 
 these, those. An adjective implying number must agree in 
 this respect with the substantive to which it relates. 
 
 Parsing. 
 
 In parsing an adjective tell : 
 
 1. The class to which it belongs. 
 
 2. The degree of comparison. 
 
 3. The use in the sentence. 
 
 Parse the adjectives in the following sentences : 
 
 1. The old house stood by the lindens. 
 
 2. Unto the pure all things are pure. 
 
 3. I feel bad early in the morning. 
 
 4. Our sweetest songs are those which tell of saddest thought. 
 
 5. Jupiter is larger than the earth. 
 
 6. He planed the board smooth. 
 
 7. She is worthy of the highest praise. 
 
 8. Three birds were killed. 
 
 9. Shining characters are not always the most agreeable. 
 
 10. Give me this peach and I will give you an apple. 
 
 11. The field of combat fills the young and bold. 
 
ADJECTIVES. 39 
 
 12. The whispering wind stirred the weeping willow and the 
 moaning pine. 
 
 13. Columbus had thought about this plan for many years, during 
 which time he had vainly sought help from royal courts. 
 
 14. He was a ready orator, an elegant poet, a skilful gardener, an 
 excellent cook, and a most contemptible sovereign. 
 
 15. He is wiser than he seems. 
 
 16. She is the most studious of the class. 
 
 17. Whatever things were gain to him, those he counted loss. 
 
 18. A clear, running brook is a beautiful sight. 
 
 19. The French soldier shot him dead. 
 
 20. He is a just, but not a generous man. 
 
 Test Questions. — Sentence- Making. 
 
 1. Into how many classes are adjectives divided? 
 
 2. AVhat distinguishes a limiting adjective from a quali- 
 fying adjective? 
 
 3. What does the word comparison mean in the phrase 
 comparison of adjectives f 
 
 4. What does an adjective of the positive degree denote ? 
 Of the comparative degree ? Of the superlative degree ? 
 
 5. How is the comparative degree of most monosyl- 
 lables formed ? Give three illustrations. 
 
 6. How is the comparative degree of most adjectives of 
 more than one syllable formed ? Give three illustrations. 
 
 7. How is the superlative degree of most adjectives of 
 one syllable formed. Give three illustrations. 
 
 8. How is the superlative degree of most adjectives of 
 more than one syllable formed ? Give three illustrations. 
 
 9. Why is it incorrect to use the superlative degree in 
 comparing two objects ? 
 
 10. What is an interrogative adjective? How many 
 interrogative adjectives are there ? 
 
EXERCISE IV. 
 
 Verbs. — Verb-Phrases. 
 
 A verb is a word that is used to assert something of a 
 person or a thing. 
 
 Verbs may be classified as complete or incomplete. 
 
 A complete verb is one that does not require a comple- 
 ment to complete the predicate ; as, 1. The old house 
 stood by the lindens. 2. He walked home in haste. 
 
 An incomplete verb is one that requires a complement 
 to complete the predicate ; as, 1. He teaches arithmetic. 2. 
 He seems very happy. 3. Cortez was a Spaniard. Verbs 
 of incomplete predication must be followed by a noun- 
 term or an adjective-term to make complete predicates. 
 Incomplete verbs are transitive or copulative. 
 
 Verbs may also be divided into transitive, intransitive, 
 copulative, regular, irregular, and auxiliary verbs. 
 
 A transitive verb is one that, in the active voice, re- 
 quires an object to complete the predicate; as, 1. Colum- 
 bus believed that the earth is round. 2. Mary wishes to 
 study Latin. 3. He said, " I will be there." 
 
 An intransitive verb is one that does not require an 
 object to complete the predicate ; as, 1. He walked to the 
 city. 2. The moonbeams glistened on the snow. 3. Our 
 deeds live after us. 
 
 40 
 
VERBS. 41 
 
 A copulative verb is one that requires a complement 
 that describes the subject; as, 1. The orange is delicious. 
 2. The air feels balmy. 3. John appears angry. 
 
 A copulative verb joins together, in logical union, the 
 subject and the predicate of a proposition. It merely 
 asserts something of some person or thing. 
 
 A regular verb is one which forms its past tense and 
 past participle by adding d or ed to the present tense-form ; 
 as, love, loved, loved; return, returned, returned. 
 
 NOTE.— Regular verbs are also called weak 
 verbs, because they always add d or ed (in a few 
 cases d has been changed to t ) to the present tense 
 to form the past tense and the past participle. 
 
 An irregular verb is one that does not form its past 
 tense and past participle by adding d or ed to the present 
 tense-form ; as, fall, fell, fallen ; write, wrote, written. 
 
 NOTE. — Irregular verbs are also called strong 
 verbs, because they always change the vowel of the 
 present tense to form the past tense and past parti- 
 ciple, but do not add an ending. 
 
 An auxiliary verb is one that is employed in the conju- 
 gation of other verbs ; as, will, in will go ; have, in have 
 loved; may, in may love. 
 
 Defective, Redundant, Impersonal, and Attributive 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 NOTE. — I. A defective verb is one in which some 
 of the parts are wanting; as, may, might; shall, should; 
 will, would. 
 
 n. A redundant verb is one which presents 
 double forms of the past tense, or past participle, or 
 both ; as, sang, sung ; got, gotten; bid, bade, bidden, bid. 
 
42 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 HI. An impersonal verb asserts action or state 
 independently of any particular subject ; as, it rains ; 
 it thunders ; it seems ; it follows. The subject of an imper- 
 sonal verb is always in the third person singular. 
 
 IV. An attributive verb is a verb that asserts an 
 attribute of its subject; as, the sun shines. In this 
 sentence the attributive verb shines asserts the attri- 
 bute shining of the subject, the sun. 
 
 V. Words that are usually other parts of speech 
 may do the work of a verb. Thus, man is a verb in 
 the sentence, " Man the boat." Up, usually a prepo- 
 sition, is a verb in the sentence, " Up with the flag." 
 Black, usually an adjective, is a verb in the sentence, 
 11 Black your shoes." While, usually an adverb, is a 
 verb in the sentence, " While away the time." 
 
 VI. Sometimes a preposition or an adverb forms 
 a part of the verb-term ; as, burn up ; stand out ; make 
 up; account for; laugh at. 
 
 VTL Transitive and copulative verbs are incom- 
 plete verbs ; active, intransitive verbs, complete. 
 
 Vm. The auxiliary verbs have, has, and will are 
 incomplete verbs when used alone as verb-terms; 
 as, I have a horse. He has money. I willed it. 
 
 IX. The verb to be is a complete verb : (1) when 
 used after the expletive " There," as, There is not a 
 perfect man; (2) when standing at the end of a 
 proposition, as, We must believe that he is. It is 
 the only pure copula verb. A few other verbs are 
 used as copulative verbs. 
 
 Verb- Phrases. 
 
 NOTE.— It is important that the pupil should 
 acquire clear ideas of the structure and work 
 done by verb-phrases. He should be required to 
 use them in original sentences, also, to point out and 
 name the parts of which each phrase is composed. 
 
 A verb-phrase is a phrase that does the work of a verb ; 
 as, 1. I am studying. 2. I do work. 3. He may go. 4. If 
 
VERBS. 43 
 
 you would help me, I would be obliged. 5. I have sent for 
 him. 6. The boy has been rewarded. 
 
 An examination of the foregoing illustrative verb-phrases 
 shows that a verb-phrase is composed of a principal verb 
 and an auxiliary verb or a verb used as an auxiliary. 
 
 Verb-phrases may be divided into four principal classes, 
 — progressive verb-phrases, emphatic verb-phrases, potential 
 verb-phrases, and conditional verb-phrases. 
 
 A progressive verb-phrase is one composed of an in- 
 complete participle and a tense of the auxiliary be; as, 1. I 
 am working. 2. I am thinking. 3. We are copying. 
 
 An emphatic verb-phrase is one composed of the pres- 
 ent or the past tense of the auxiliary do and the root infini- 
 tive of a principal verb ; as, 1. I do work. 2. I did work. 
 
 A potential verb-phrase is one composed of one of the 
 auxiliaries may, can, must, might, could, would, or should, 
 and the root infinitive of a principal verb; as, 1. He may 
 go. 2. She can go. 3. John must walk. 4. Mary could go. 
 These phrases denote potentiality. 
 
 A conditional verb-phrase is one used in making a 
 conditional statement; as, 1. If he should send for me, I 
 would go. 2. If you would help me, I should be obliged. 
 
 NOTE. — Must, should, and ought are used in obliga- 
 tive phrases. That is, in phrases that are used to 
 express obligation or necessity. 
 
 An active verb-phrase is one in which the subject is 
 the actor; as, 1. John has solved the problem. 2. The 
 servant has completed the task. 
 
44 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 A passive verb-phrase is one in which the subject is 
 the receiver of the action; as, 1. John has been punished. 
 2. The lamp was lighted by the servant. 
 
 List of Irregular Verbs.* 
 
 TO THE TEACHER : The list of irregular verbs 
 is given that it may be referred to when necessary. 
 It is not intended that the list should be learned by 
 rote. Pupils know the past tense and past parti- 
 ciple of most verbs before they begin the study of 
 grammar. Pupils should be questioned on the list 
 and required to give the principal parts of the verbs 
 that are most frequently misused. 
 
 Pres. Past. 
 
 Past P. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Past P. 
 
 Abide abode 
 
 abode 
 
 Bind 
 
 bound 
 
 bound 
 
 Am, be was 
 
 been 
 
 Bite 
 
 bit 
 
 bitten, bit 
 
 Arise arose 
 
 arisen 
 
 Bleed 
 
 bled 
 
 bled 
 
 Awake awoke, r 
 
 . awaked 
 
 Bless 
 
 blest, r. 
 
 blest, r. 
 
 Bake baked 
 
 Bear \ bore > 
 ( bare 
 
 f baked, 
 I baken 
 
 [• born 
 
 Blow 
 Break 
 
 Breed 
 
 blew 
 f broke, 
 I brake 
 
 bred 
 
 blown 
 [■ broken 
 
 bred 
 
 Bear J bore ' 
 ( bare 
 
 \ borne 
 
 Bring 
 Build 
 
 brought 
 built, r. 
 
 brought 
 built, r. 
 
 (to carry) 
 
 
 Burn 
 
 burnt, r. 
 
 burnt, r. 
 
 Beat beat 
 
 f beaten, 
 I beat 
 
 Burst 
 Buy 
 
 burst 
 bought 
 
 burst 
 bought 
 
 Begin began 
 
 begun 
 
 Can 
 
 could 
 
 
 Bend bent, r. 
 
 bent, r. 
 
 Cast 
 
 cast 
 
 cast 
 
 Bereave bereft, r. 
 
 bereft, r. 
 
 Catch 
 
 caught 
 
 caught 
 
 Beseech besought 
 
 besought 
 
 Chide 
 
 chid 
 
 J chidden, 
 I chid 
 
 Bet bet, r. 
 
 bet, r. 
 
 
 
 Bid bid, bade 
 
 bidden, bid 
 
 Choose 
 
 chose 
 
 chosen 
 
 * Those marked r are also used as regular verbs. 
 
VERBS. 
 
 45 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Past P. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Past P. 
 
 Cleave < 
 
 ■ clove, r. 
 cleft, 
 
 1 cloven, 
 J cleft 
 
 Gird 
 Give 
 
 girt, R. 
 gave 
 
 girt, r. 
 given 
 
 
 . clave 
 
 Go 
 
 went 
 
 gone 
 
 (to split) 
 
 
 
 Grave 
 
 grave 
 
 graven, r. 
 
 Cling 
 
 clung 
 
 clung 
 
 Grind 
 
 ground 
 
 ground 
 
 Clothe 
 
 clad, r. 
 
 clad, r. 
 
 Grow 
 
 grew 
 
 grown 
 
 Come 
 
 came 
 
 come 
 
 Hang 
 
 hung, r. 
 
 hung 
 
 Cost 
 
 cost 
 
 cost 
 
 Have 
 
 had 
 
 had 
 
 Creep 
 
 crept 
 
 crept 
 
 Hear 
 
 heard 
 
 heard 
 
 Crow 
 
 crew, r. 
 
 crowed 
 
 Heave 
 
 hove, r. 
 
 hove, r. 
 
 Cut 
 
 cut 
 
 cut 
 
 Hew 
 
 hewed 
 
 hewn, r. 
 
 Dare 
 
 durst, r. 
 
 dared 
 
 Hide 
 
 hid 
 
 hidden, hid 
 
 Deal 
 
 dealt 
 
 dealt, r. 
 
 Hit 
 
 hit 
 
 hit 
 
 Dig 
 Do 
 
 dug, R. 
 did 
 
 dug, R. 
 done 
 
 Hold 
 
 held 
 
 f held, 
 I holden 
 
 Draw 
 
 drew 
 
 drawn 
 
 Hurt 
 
 hurt 
 
 hurt 
 
 Dream 
 
 dreamt, f 
 
 t. dreamt, r. 
 
 Keep 
 
 kept 
 
 kept 
 
 Dress 
 
 drest, r. 
 
 drest, r. 
 
 Kneel 
 
 knelt, r. 
 
 knelt, r. 
 
 l~)rink 
 
 drank 
 
 ( drank, 
 (. drunk 
 
 Knit 
 
 knit, r. 
 
 knit, r. 
 
 i~J l 1 1 i IV 
 
 UI *l 1 i IV 
 
 Know 
 
 knew 
 
 known 
 
 Drive 
 
 drove 
 
 driven 
 
 Lade 
 
 laded 
 
 laden, r. 
 
 Dwell 
 
 dwelt, r. 
 
 dwelt, r. 
 
 Lay 
 
 laid 
 
 laid 
 
 Eat 
 
 ate 
 
 eaten 
 
 Lead 
 
 led 
 
 led 
 
 Fall 
 
 fell 
 
 fallen 
 
 Lean 
 
 leant, r. 
 
 leant, r. 
 
 Feed 
 
 fed 
 
 fed 
 
 Leap 
 
 leapt, r. 
 
 leapt, r. 
 
 Feel 
 
 felt 
 
 felt 
 
 Leave 
 
 left 
 
 left 
 
 Fight 
 
 fought 
 
 fought 
 
 Lend 
 
 lent 
 
 lent 
 
 Find 
 
 found 
 
 found 
 
 Let 
 
 let 
 
 let 
 
 Flee 
 
 fled 
 
 fled 
 
 Lie 
 
 lay 
 
 lain 
 
 Fling 
 
 flung 
 
 flung 
 
 (recline) 
 
 
 
 Fly 
 
 flew 
 
 flown 
 
 Light 
 
 lit, r. 
 
 lit, r. 
 
 Forsake 
 
 forsook 
 
 forsaken 
 
 Lose 
 
 lost 
 
 lost 
 
 Freeze 
 
 froze 
 
 frozen 
 
 Make 
 
 made 
 
 made 
 
 Get 
 
 got 
 
 got, gotten 
 
 May 
 
 might 
 
 
 Gild 
 
 gilt, r. 
 
 gilt, r. 
 
 Mean 
 
 meant 
 
 meant 
 
46 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Past P. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Past P. 
 
 Meet 
 
 met 
 
 met 
 
 Shred 
 
 shred 
 
 shred 
 
 Mow 
 
 mowed 
 
 mown, r. 
 
 Shrink 
 
 f shrunk, 
 ( shrank 
 
 f shrunk, 
 ( shrunken 
 
 Pay 
 
 paid 
 
 paid 
 
 *- -' X i. 1 111 IV 
 
 Pen 
 
 pent, r. 
 
 pent, r. 
 
 Shut 
 
 shut 
 
 shut 
 
 {to inclose) 
 Put put 
 
 put 
 
 Sing 
 
 f sang, 
 ( sung 
 
 | sung 
 
 Quit 
 
 quit, r. 
 
 quit, r. 
 
 Sink 
 
 ( sank, 
 I sunk 
 
 [■ sunk 
 
 Rap 
 
 rapt, r. 
 
 rapt, r. 
 
 
 Read 
 
 read 
 
 read 
 
 Sit 
 
 sat 
 
 sat 
 
 Rend 
 
 rent 
 
 rent 
 
 Slay 
 
 slew 
 
 slain 
 
 Rid 
 
 rid 
 
 rid 
 
 Sleep 
 
 slept 
 
 slept 
 
 Ride 
 Ring 
 
 rode 
 f rang, 
 1 rung 
 
 ridden 
 [rung 
 
 Slide 
 Sling 
 
 slid 
 slung 
 
 f slidden, 
 (slid 
 slung 
 
 Rise 
 
 rose 
 
 risen 
 
 Slink 
 
 slunk 
 
 slunk 
 
 Rive 
 
 rived 
 
 riven, r. 
 
 Slit 
 
 slit 
 
 slit, R. 
 
 Run 
 
 Saw 
 
 ran 
 sawed 
 
 run 
 sawn, r. 
 
 Smite 
 
 smote 
 
 f smitten, 
 I smit 
 
 Say 
 
 said 
 
 said 
 
 Sow 
 
 sowed 
 
 sown, r. 
 
 See 
 Seek 
 
 saw 
 sought 
 
 seen 
 sought 
 
 Speak 
 
 f spoke, 
 I spake 
 
 [■ spoken 
 
 Seethe 
 
 seethed 
 
 sodden, r. 
 
 Speed 
 
 sped 
 
 sped 
 
 Sell 
 
 sold 
 
 sold 
 
 Spend 
 
 spent 
 
 spent 
 
 Send 
 
 sent 
 
 sent 
 
 Spill 
 
 spilt, R. 
 
 spilt, R. 
 
 Set 
 Shake 
 
 set 
 shook 
 
 set 
 shaken 
 
 Spin 
 
 ( spun, 
 i span 
 
 [ spun 
 
 Shall 
 Shape 
 
 should 
 shaped 
 
 shapen, r. 
 
 Spit 
 
 f spit, 
 1 spat 
 
 [ spit 
 
 Shave 
 
 shaved 
 
 shaven, r. 
 
 Split 
 
 split 
 
 split 
 
 Shear 
 
 sheared 
 
 shorn, r. 
 
 Spread 
 
 spread 
 
 spread 
 
 Shed 
 
 shed 
 
 shed 
 
 Spring 
 
 sprang 
 
 sprung 
 
 Shine 
 
 shone, r. 
 
 shone, r. 
 
 Stand 
 
 stood 
 
 stood 
 
 Shoe 
 
 shod 
 
 shod 
 
 Stave 
 
 f staved, 
 I stove 
 
 ) staved, 
 J stove 
 
 Shoot 
 
 shot 
 
 shot 
 
 kJLCL V \J 
 
 Show 
 
 showed 
 
 shown, r. 
 
 Steal 
 
 stole 
 
 stolen 
 
VERBS. 
 
 47 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Past P. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Past P. 
 
 Stay 
 
 f staid, 
 1 stayed 
 
 1 staid, 
 ) stayed 
 
 Teach 
 
 taught 
 
 taught 
 
 Tell 
 
 told 
 
 told 
 
 Stick 
 
 stuck 
 
 stuck 
 
 Think 
 
 thought 
 
 thought 
 
 Sting 
 Stride 
 
 stung 
 strode 
 
 stung 
 stridden 
 
 Thrive 
 
 f thrived, 
 ( throve 
 
 [■ thriven, r. 
 
 Strike 
 
 struck 
 
 f struck, 
 ( stricken 
 
 Throw 
 Thrust 
 
 threw 
 thrust 
 
 thrown 
 thrust 
 
 String 
 Strive 
 
 strung 
 strove 
 
 strung 
 striven 
 
 Tread 
 
 trod 
 
 f trodden, 
 1 trod 
 
 Strew 
 
 strewed 
 
 strown, r. 
 
 Wax 
 
 waxed 
 
 waxen, r. 
 
 Swear 
 
 | swore, 
 ( sware 
 
 [• sworn 
 
 Wear 
 Weave 
 
 wore 
 wove 
 
 worn 
 woven 
 
 Sweat 
 
 sweat 
 
 sweat, r. 
 
 Weep 
 
 wept 
 
 wept 
 
 Sweep 
 
 swept 
 
 swept 
 
 Wet 
 
 wet, r. 
 
 wet, r. 
 
 Swell 
 
 swelled 
 
 swollen, r. 
 
 Whet 
 
 whet, r. 
 
 whet, r. 
 
 Swim 
 
 f swam, 
 1 swum 
 
 [■ swum 
 
 Will 
 Win 
 
 would 
 won 
 
 won 
 
 Swing 
 
 swung 
 
 swung 
 
 Wind 
 
 wound, r. wound 
 
 Take 
 
 took 
 
 taken 
 
 Work 
 
 wrought, 
 
 r. wrought, r 
 
 Tear 
 
 | tore, 
 I tare 
 
 [• torn 
 
 Wring 
 
 wrung 
 
 wrung 
 
 
 Write 
 
 wrote 
 
 written 
 
 Test Questions. — Sentence-Making. 
 
 TO THE TEACHER: Recitation without ample 
 illustration and application by the pupil is a school- 
 room farce. A pupil may perfectly recite the text 
 of his lesson, yet not know the lesson. In some 
 schools pupils learn much they never know. The 
 method of the author and of the teacher should 
 compel the pupil to be more than a passive receiver 
 of instruction ; it should compel him to be an active 
 doer. Mere learning is not culture; it is only the 
 crude material which the mind uses in acquiring 
 culture. Sentence-making reviews similar to the 
 illustrations given require definite thinking on the 
 
48 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 part of the pupil and exact teaching on the part of 
 the teacher. The pupil must concentrate his atten- 
 tion and the teacher must know the structure of 
 the sentence. If the memorization and recitation of 
 grammatical facts and rules are helpful to the pupil 
 in the grades, sentence-making exercise "which re- 
 quires him to use the facts and rules in original sen- 
 tences is surely more helpful. The pupil can master 
 the structure of sentences only by constructing 
 sentences. There is only one "way to learn to ex- 
 press thought correctly and concisely, — that is, by 
 the reflective use of words in composition. 
 
 I am prepared to state that pupils in the gram- 
 mar grades like sentence-making exercises. This 
 method of fixing the relations of grammatical ele~ 
 ments is not an untried theory of a college profes- 
 sor who has never taught English grammar, but an 
 experience of your humble servant. For years I 
 used it in my work as teacher ; for years I used it as 
 superintendent of schools. 
 
 1. What is a verb ? What is a verb-term ? 
 
 2. Into how many classes may verbs be divided ? 
 
 3. In what important respect does an incomplete verb 
 differ from a complete verb ? In the first of two sentences, 
 use an incomplete verb : in the second, a complete verb. 
 
 4. In what important respect does a transitive verb 
 differ from a copulative verb ? 
 
 5. Why are transitive and copulative verbs incomplete 
 verbs ? 
 
 6. Why are active, intransitive verbs complete verbs ? 
 
 7. In what important respect does an active intransitive 
 verb differ from an active transitive verb ? 
 
 8. Show that a verb may be transitive in one sentence 
 and intransitive in another sentence ? 
 
 9. Why is is sometimes called a complete verb ? 
 
VERBS. 49 
 
 10. Give examples in which is is used (1) as an incomplete 
 verb ; (2) in which it is used as a complete verb. 
 
 11. Complete the meaning of a different transitive verb: 
 (1) with a noun, word-form ; (2) with a noun, phrase-form ; 
 (3) with a noun, clause-form. 
 
 12. Complete the meaning of a different copulative verb : 
 (1) with a noun, word-form ; (2) with a noun, phrase-form ; 
 (3) with a noun, clause-form. 
 
 13. Complete the meaning of the same copulative verb: 
 (1) with an adjective, word-form ; (2) with an adjective, 
 phrase-form. 
 
 14. What is a progressive verb-phrase? In each of 
 three sentences, use a progressive verb-phrase and point 
 out its parts. 
 
 15. What is an emphatic verb-phrase? In each of three 
 sentences, use an emphatic verb-phrase. 
 
 16. What is a potential verb-phrase ? In two sentences, 
 use a potential verb-phrase and point out its parts. 
 
 17. What is a conditional verb-phrase? In each of 
 three sentences, use a conditional verb-phrase, and tell 
 why it is a conditional phrase. 
 
 18. What is an active verb-phrase? In each of three 
 sentences, use an active verb-phrase and tell why it is 
 called active. 
 
 19. What is a passive verb-phrase? Why is it called 
 passive ? Use two passive verb-phrases. 
 
 20. Show that a verb-phrase in the passive voice is the 
 equivalent of a copula verb and its complement. 
 
 For directions and models for parsing verbs and verb- 
 phrases, see the next Exercise. 
 
EXERCISE V. 
 Mode, Tense, Voice, Conjugation. 
 
 Mode. 
 
 Mode is the form of the verb that indicates the manner 
 of the assertion. 
 
 There are three modes, — the indicative, the imperative, 
 and the subjunctive. 
 
 The indicative mode expresses being, action, or state as 
 a fact ; as, I am. Gold glitters. He will come. 
 
 The imperative mode expresses being, action, or state 
 as willed or desired ; as, Hear me for my cause. Give us 
 this day our daily bread. 
 
 The subjunctive mode is used in subordinate clauses 
 to express a future contingency, a supposition contrary to 
 fact, or a wish ; as, If I were you, I would go. If God 
 send thee a cross, take it up willingly. 
 
 NOTE.— The subjunctive has very nearly gone 
 out of use in modern English. This is true espe- 
 cially of its preterit tense. No verb except be has 
 8 preterit subjunctive that differs from the indica- 
 tive. In place of the subjunctive we use either the 
 indicative or some of the verb-phrases. — Whitney. 
 
 Tense. 
 
 Tense is the form of the verb that indicates the time of 
 the act or state and the degree of completeness. 
 
 60 
 
TENSE. 51 
 
 There are six tenses, — the present, the past, the future, 
 the present-perfect, the past-perfect, the future-perfect. 
 
 The present tense of a verb expresses being, action, or 
 state in present time ; as, I am. You study. He sleeps. 
 
 The past tense of a verb expresses being, action, or 
 state in past time ; as, I was. You studied. He slept. 
 
 The future tense of a verb expresses being, action, or 
 state in future time ; as, I shall or will be. You shall or icill 
 study. He shall or will sleep. 
 
 The present-perfect tense of a verb expresses being, 
 action, or state as completed at the present time ; as, I 
 have been. You have studied. He has slept. 
 
 The past-perfect tense of a verb expresses being, action, 
 or state as completed at or before some past time ; as, I 
 had been. You had studied. He had slept. 
 
 The future-perfect tense of a verb expresses being, 
 action, or state that will have been completed at or before 
 some future time ; as, I shall have been. You will have 
 studied. He will have slept. 
 
 The indicative mode has six tenses, — the present, the 
 present-perfect, the past, the past-perfect, the future, the 
 future-perfect. 
 
 The imperative mode has one tense, — the present. 
 
 The subjunctive mode has separate forms in but two 
 tenses, — the present and the past. 
 
 NOTES.— I. The indicative mode is used: (1) to 
 state facts; (2) to ask questions; (3) to express a 
 supposition in which the conditions are dealt with 
 as if they were facts. 
 
52 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 n. The imperative mode is used only in the sec- 
 ond person, singular or plural. 
 
 in. The subjunctive mode is almost obsolete. It 
 has been supplanted by the indicative. 
 
 Voice. 
 
 Voice is that form of a transitive verb which shows 
 whether the subject acts or is acted upon. 
 
 Transitive verbs have two forms to express voice, — the 
 active and the passive. 
 
 Verbs are in the active voice when they represent the 
 subject as acting; as, John struck William. James read 
 the book. 
 
 Verbs are in the passive voice when they represent the 
 subject as being acted upon ; as, William was struck by 
 John. The book was read by James. 
 
 Annex an object, and change the following transitive verbs 
 from the active to the passive voice : 
 
 Mary loved. They read. Henry lost. The children played. 
 Augustus threw. Anna found. He rowed. Hear. The father 
 punished. Jane broke. Give. Will you lend ? 
 
 Change the following transitive verbs from the passive to the 
 active form, and supply a subject when it is omitted: 
 
 America was discovered in 1492. Religious liberty was estab- 
 lished in Rhode Island. Magna Charta was granted to the English. 
 The Mexicans were defeated at Buena Vista. The king was con- 
 cealed in the tree. The retreat of the Greeks was conducted very 
 skilfully. A great battle was fought at Marathon. The Gunpowder 
 Plot was discovered. King Charles was restored to the throne in 
 1660. "Paradise Lost" was written by Milton. " The Messiah" 
 was written by a distinguished poet. 
 
CONJUGATION. 
 
 53 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 The conjugation of a verb is the regular arrangement of 
 its several modes, tenses, voices, numbers, and persons. 
 
 The principal parts of a verb are the root infinitive (the 
 present indicative), the past tense (the past indicative), and 
 the past participle. 
 
 A verb takes its number and person from its subject. 
 The form of the verb, however, does not always depend on 
 the person and number of its subject. 
 
 Conjugation of the Verb Be. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PAST. PRES. PART. PAST PART 
 
 Principal Parts : Be, 
 
 Was, Being, Been. 
 
 INDICATIVE MODE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 PAST TENSE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I am. 1. We are. 
 
 1. I was. 1. We were. 
 
 2. You are. 2. You are. 
 
 2. You were. 2. You were. 
 
 3. He is. 3. They are. 
 
 3. He was. 3. They were 
 
 PRESENT PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I have been. 
 
 2. You have been. 
 
 3. He has been. 
 
 1. We have been. 
 
 2. You have been. 
 
 3. They have been. 
 
 PAST PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. I had been. 
 
 2. You had been. 
 
 3. He had been. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. We had been. 
 
 2. You had been. 
 
 3. They had been. 
 
LISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 /furor/. 
 1. I shall be. 1. We shall be. 
 
 3 I j will be. 2. Y; 
 
 Be will be. Thev will be. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 .all have been. 1. We shall have been. 
 
 . Ton will have been. I I u will have been. 
 
 r been. 
 
 SCBJUAC 
 enerally used that, though.) 
 
 PRESEST HUBS BB5K. 
 
 •> Pfural. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I be. 1. We be. 1. I 1. We were. 
 
 . ': a be. . . Y ?u were. . Y mi were. 
 
 3. H : - ere. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOr 
 
 PfuraL 
 . Be (thou). 
 
 INFOimVES 
 
 ~ -:>:-.- To 
 
 . r -- - - : : ;-': - have been. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Prt&nt. Being. ?-_ 
 
 r. Having been. 
 
CONJUGATION. 
 
 55 
 
 Conjugation of the Verb Give. 
 
 Root, give. Principal parts, give, gave, given. 
 
 INDICATIVE MODE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I give. 1. We give. 
 
 2. You give. 2. You give. 
 
 3. He gives. 3. They give. 
 
 PAST TENSE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I gave. 1. We gave. 
 
 2. You gave. 2. You gave. 
 
 3. He gave. 3. They gave. 
 
 PRESENT PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I have given. 1. We have given. 
 
 2. You have given. 2. You have given. 
 
 3. He has given. 3. They have given. 
 
 PAST PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. I had given. 
 
 2. You had given. 
 
 3. He had given. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. We had given. 
 
 2. You had given. 
 
 3. They had given. 
 
 FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. I shall give. 
 
 2. You will give. 
 
 3. He will give. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. We shall give. 
 
 2. You will give. 
 
 3. They will give. 
 
 FUTURE PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I shall have given. 1. We shall have given. 
 
 2. You will have given. 2. You will have given. 
 
 3. He will have given. 3. They will have given. 
 
56 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 (Generally used after if, though.) 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. I give. 1. We give. 
 
 2. You give. 2. You give. 
 
 3. He give. 3. They give. 
 
 PAST TENSE, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. I gave. 
 
 2. You gave 
 
 3. He gave. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. We gave. 
 
 2. You gave. 
 
 3. They gave. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MODE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Singular 
 2. Give. 
 
 Plural. 
 2. Give you. 
 
 INFINITIVES. 
 
 Present. To give. 
 
 Present Perfect. To have given. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present. Giving. Past. Given. 
 
 Perfect. Having given. 
 
 The synopsis of a verb is a short view of it, showing 
 its forms through the modes and tenses in a single number 
 and person. 
 
 Following is a synopsis of the verb be in the second 
 person, singular : 
 
 INDICATIVE MODE. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Present Perfect Tense. 
 Past Tense. 
 Past Perfect Tense. 
 Future Tense. 
 Future Perfect Tense. 
 
 You were. 
 
 You have been. 
 
 You were. 
 
 You had been. 
 
 You will be. 
 
 You will have been. 
 
CONJUGATION. 57 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 Present Tense. If you be. 
 
 Past Tense. If you have been. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MODE. 
 
 Present Tense. Be thou. 
 
 Synopsis of the verb eat in the first person singular : 
 
 INDICATIVE MODE. 
 
 Present Tense. I eat. 
 
 Present Perfect Tense. I have eaten. 
 
 Past Tense. I ate. 
 
 Past Perfect Tense. I had eaten. 
 
 Future Tense. I shall eat. 
 
 Future Perfect Tense. I shall have eaten. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 Present Tense. If I eat. 
 
 Past Tense. If I ate. 
 
 Interrogative and Negative Forms. 
 
 A verb is conjugated interrogatively in the indicative 
 mode by placing the subject after it, or after the first aux- 
 iliary ; as, Do I love ? Have I loved ? Did I love ? Had I 
 loved ? Shall I love ? Shall I have loved ? 
 
 A verb is conjugated negatively by placing the adverb not 
 after it, or after the first auxiliary ; as, I love not, or I do 
 not love. I have not loved. I love not, or I did not love. 
 I had not loved, etc. Inf., Not to love. Not to have loved. 
 Part., Not loving. Not having loved. 
 
 Give a synopsis of each of the following verbs in the 
 first, the second, and the third person : Believe, defy, think. 
 
58 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Progressive and Emphatic Forms. 
 
 The progressive form is the verb be joined to the present 
 participle. The passive form is the verb be joined to the 
 passive participle; as, I am reading; I teas reading; I am 
 pleased; I was pleased. 
 
 The emphatic form is found only in the indicative and 
 the imperative mode. The auxiliary do is added to the 
 simple verb for the present and did for the past ; as, I do 
 love ; I did love. 
 
 Give a synopsis of write, lend, and play in the second 
 and the third person, singular and plural. 
 
 TO TEACHER AND PUPIL: The only tenses 
 ■which change their termination are the present and 
 the past ; as, sit, sits, sat ; tarry, tarries, tarried. All 
 other changes are made by means of auxiliaries. 
 That is, an inspection of the conjugation of a verb 
 shows that our language is almost inflectionless. 
 
 Parsing. 
 
 In parsing a verb tell : 
 
 1. Whether it is complete or incomplete (if incomplete, 
 
 whether it is transitive or copulative), regular, or 
 irregular (if irregular, give its principal parts). 
 
 2. Mode, Tense, Voice, Person, Number, and Agree- 
 
 ment with its subject. 
 
 In parsing a verb-phrase tell : 
 
 1. The exact kind, — whether it is active, passive, pro- 
 
 gressive, emphatic, or potential. 
 
 2. The parts of which it is composed, — auxiliary and 
 
 principal verb or participle. 
 
 3. Inflection of tense. 
 
 4. Agreement with its subject. 
 
PARSING. 59 
 
 NOTES.— I. A verb-phrase should be parsed as a 
 unit. It does the work of a verb. The mind grasps 
 it as an entirety. Nothing is gained by parsing its 
 part separatively. 
 
 n. The auxiliary or assertive part of a word- 
 phrase includes all the phrase, except the last word, 
 which expresses the attribute of the subject. 
 
 Parse the verbs and verb-phrases in the following sen- 
 tences : 
 
 1. The boy walks rapidly. 
 
 MODEL.— Walk* is a complete verb, regular, in- 
 dicative mode, present tense ; third person, singular 
 number, to agree with its subject boy. 
 
 2. He was considered upright, yet he did many things that were 
 condemned. 
 
 MODEL.— Did is an incomplete verb, transitive, 
 irregular ; principal parts, do, did, done; active voice, 
 indicative mode, past tense ; third person, singular 
 number, to agree with its subject he. 
 
 3. The book may have been written by one who is living in the 
 city of Philadelphia. 
 
 MODEL. — May have been written is a passive, poten- 
 tial verb-phrase, composed of the auxiliary may have 
 been and the perfect participle of the verb write; prin- 
 cipal parts, write, wrote, written ; present-perfect tense ; 
 third person, singular number, to agree with its sub- 
 ject book. 
 
 Is living is a progressive verb-phrase composed 
 of the auxiliary is and the present participle of the 
 verb live, present tense ; third person, singular num- 
 ber, to agree with its subject who. 
 
 NOTE. — The foregoing models are from the 
 author's "Lessons in Grammar," pages 65, 66. 
 
60 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Parse the verbs and the verb-phrases in the following 
 sentences : 
 
 1. The child believes you. 
 
 2. She worked faithfully. 
 
 3. The master struck his pupil. 
 
 4. The boat struck on a reef. 
 
 5. He walked to town. 
 
 6. She seems happy. 
 
 7. My friend is a musician. 
 
 8. He was disappointed. 
 
 9. The air feels balmy. 
 
 10. He might have been happy. 
 
 11. John wishes to study Latin. 
 
 12. Anthracite coal burns slowly. 
 
 13. He burned his hand. 
 
 14. He ought to do better. 
 
 15. I am reading. 
 
 16. I do read every evening. 
 
 17. He did work. 
 
 18. I could have gone. 
 
 19. If he sends for me, I shall go. 
 
 20. If they should send for me, I would go. 
 
 21. I sent him home. 
 
 22. He was sent home. 
 
 23. The servant has lighted the lamp. 
 
 24. The boy was punished by his father. 
 
 25. I do love. 
 
 26. He did love. 
 
 27. She was loved. 
 
 28. America was discovered by Columbus,, 
 
 29. Has he come ? 
 
 30. She can play. 
 
 31. I love to see the sun shine. 
 
 32. Loving is living. 
 
 33. The boys rowed the boat. 
 
TEST-QUESTIONS. 61 
 
 Parse the verbs and verb-phrases in the following quota- 
 tions : 
 
 I. In August, even, not a breeze can stir but it thrills us with the 
 breath of autumn. A pensive glory is seen in the far, golden gleams 
 among the shadows of the trees. — Hawthorne. 
 
 II. Reproach did not spare Braddock even in his grave. Still, his 
 dauntless conduct on the field of battle shows him to have been a 
 man of fearless spirit ; and he was universally allowed to be an 
 accomplished disciplinarian. Whatever may have been his faults 
 and errors, he expiated them by the hardest lot that can befall a 
 brave soldier, ambitious of renown, — an unhonored grave in a 
 strange land, a memory clouded by misfortune, and a name forever 
 coupled with defeat. — Irving. 
 
 III. The Birthday of Washington. — The birthday of the "Father 
 of his Country !" May it ever be freshly remembered by American 
 hearts ! May it ever reawaken in them a filial veneration for his 
 memory ; ever rekindle the fires of patriotic regard to the country 
 which he loved so well ; to which he gave his youthful vigor and his 
 youthful energy during the perilous period of the early Indian war- 
 fare ; to which he devoted his life, in the maturity of his powers, in 
 the field ; to which again he offered the counsels of his wisdom and 
 his experience as president of the convention that framed our Consti- 
 tution ; which he guided and directed while in the chair of state, and 
 for which the last prayer of his earthly supplication was offered up 
 when it came the moment for him so well, and so grandly, and so 
 calmly to die ! He was the first man of the time in which he grew. 
 His memory is first and most sacred in our love ; and ever hereafter, 
 till the last drop of blood shall freeze in the last American heart, 
 his name shall be a spell of power and might. — Rufus Choate. 
 
 Test-Questions. 
 
 1. What is meant by mode as used in grammar? 
 
 2. What is meant by tense as used in grammar ? 
 
62 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 3. When is a verb in the indicative mode ? Give two 
 examples. 
 
 4. What does the imperative mode express ? Illustrate. 
 
 5. When is a verb in the subjunctive mode ? 
 
 6. How many tenses has each mode ? Name them. 
 
 7. What is meant by the word voice as used in gram- 
 mar ? Illustrate. 
 
 8. What kind of verbs have voice ? Give two illustra- 
 tions of what is meant by voice. 
 
 9. What is meant by the word conjugation f 
 
 10. What is meant by the phrase synopsis of a verb? 
 
 11. What is meant by the phrase principal parts of a 
 verb f Illustrate. 
 
 1 2. Give the principal parts of the following verbs : Ex- 
 plain, rely, write, shine, hurt, feel, go, smell, sit, set, lie, lay, 
 speak, sail, run, eat, see, burn, glaze, try, smile, shut, leave, 
 buy, alter. 
 
 13. In what important respect do the principal parts of 
 an irregular verb differ from the principal parts of a regular 
 verb ? Illustrate. 
 
 14. In each of two sentences, use a verb, first in the 
 active, then in the passive voice. 
 
 15. Give the past tense and the past participle of teach, 
 sing, read, write, arise, sit, beat, tell, walk. 
 
EXERCISE VI. 
 
 Adverbs. 
 
 An adverb is a word used to modify the meaning of a 
 verb, an adjective, or another adverb. 
 
 Adverbs may be divided into four general classes, — 
 adverbs of place, of time, of cause, of manner. 
 
 Adverbs of place answer the questions where, whither, 
 whence. Illustrate. 
 
 Adverbs of time answer the questions when, how long, 
 how often. Illustrate. 
 
 Adverbs of cause answer the questions why, wherefore, 
 then. Illustrate. 
 
 Adverbs of manner and degree answer the questions 
 how, how much. 
 
 Many adverbs have comparison ; as, soon, sooner, soon- 
 est ; often, oftener, oftenest ; brightly, more brightly, most 
 brightly. 
 
 The largest class of adverbs is derived from adjectives by 
 adding the suffix ly ; as, truly, clearly, hastily, wholly, 
 splendidly, smoothly. 
 
 There is used as an expletive, — a word used to fill a va- 
 cancy, — to introduce a sentence when the verb to be denotes 
 existence ; as, There were giants in those days. There 
 comes a time when we must die. 
 
 63 
 
64 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Many phrases have the value of single adverbs, and should 
 be treated as such ; as, by stealth, of yore, at random, at 
 all, at once, at last, at least, in like manner, in part, in short, 
 in vain, in general, as yet, by far, of old, of late, ere long, 
 from far, on high, for good. 
 
 The adverb so is often used as a substitute for some pre- 
 ceding word or group of words ; as, He is in good business, 
 and is likely to remain so. 
 
 Some adverbs limit no particular word or words in the 
 sentence ; they are used independently ; as, Why, you told 
 me so yourself. Well, I will let you know if I decide to go. 
 
 Some adverbs throw their force upon statements, thus 
 showing how the thought is conceived ; as, Certainly I be- 
 lieve you. Perhaps it is true. Undoubtedly he will pay 
 the note. Such adverbs are called adverbs of modality. 
 Yes, no, not are classed as adverbs of modality. 
 
 A conjunctive adverb is one which expresses the adverb- 
 ial relation of a dependent clause and connects it with the 
 verb, the adjective, or the adverb which it modifies. That 
 is, conjunctive adverbs modify and connect; as, 1. I shall 
 meet my friend when the boat arrives. 2. Whither I go 
 ye cannot come. 3. It is uncertain where the gypsies origi- 
 nated. In 1, when modifies shall meet and connects the two 
 sentences. In 2, whither modifies go and connects the two 
 sentences. In 3, where modifies the adjective uncertain 
 and connects the two sentences. 
 
 The same introductory word may introduce a noun clause, 
 an adjective clause, or an adverb clause; as, 1. Where he 
 fell is uncertain. 2. This is the place where he lived. 3. He 
 died inhere he fell. 
 
ADVERBS. 65 
 
 Correct the following examples (1) with reference to 
 choice of adverb ; (2) with reference to form ; (3) with refer- 
 ence to position. 
 
 1. Speak slow and distinct. 
 
 2. You have behaved very bad. 
 
 3. This pen does not write good. 
 
 4. At this place, the mountains are extraordinary high and 
 remarkable steep. 
 
 5. He lived an extreme hard life. 
 
 6. An abominable ugly little woman officiated at the table. 
 
 7. The fox is an exceeding artful animal. 
 
 8. He is doing fine. 
 
 9. People say he is independent rich. 
 
 10. You have been wrong informed on the subject. 
 
 11. She dresses suitable to her station and means. 
 
 12. Agreeable to the present arrangement, I shall have to recite 
 my Greek during the first hour. 
 
 13. The insolent proud soon acquire enemies. 
 
 14. You did the work as good as I could expect. 
 
 15. The man was so bruised that he scarce knew himself. 
 
 16. As like as not, you love her yourself. 
 
 17. I can easier raise a crop of hemp than a crop of tobacco. 
 
 18. Abstract principles are easiest learned when they are clearest 
 illustrated. 
 
 19. A wicked man is not happy, though he be never so hardened 
 in conscience. 
 
 20. Snow seldom or ever falls in the southern part of Texas. 
 
 21. Whether you are willing or no, you certainly will have to 
 pay the debt. 
 
 22. Nothing farther was said about the matter. 
 
 23. It rains most every day. 
 
 24. This wheat stands most too thick. 
 
 25. Who brought me here, will also take me from hence. 
 
 26. We remained a week at Galveston, and proceeded from thence 
 to Indianola. 
 
 5 
 
66 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 27. Such cloaks were in fashion about five years since. 
 
 28. It is impossible continually to be at work. 
 
 29. I am some better than I was. 
 
 30. Every man cannot afford to keep a coach. 
 
 31. All their neighbors were not invited. 
 
 32. All that we hear, we should not believe. 
 
 33. The two young ladies from Chicago came to the party nearly 
 dressed alike. 
 
 34. I only recited one lesson during the whole day. 
 
 35. He is only so when he is drunk. 
 
 36. I only bought the horse, and not the buggy. 
 
 37. Such prices are only paid in times of great scarcity. 
 
 38. The interest not only had been paid, but the greater part of 
 the principal also. 
 
 39. If you have only learned to spend money extravagantly at 
 college, you may stay at home. 
 
 40. The school must carefully be conducted to please all such 
 patrons. 
 
 41. The words of a sentence should be arranged so that harmony 
 may be promoted. 
 
 42. Nature mixes the elements variously and curiously sometimes, 
 it is true. 
 
 43. You are to slowly raise the trap, while I hold the sack. 
 
 44. Having almost lost a thousand dollars by the speculation, he 
 was able only to pay part of it back. 
 
 45. We do those things frequently which we repent of after care- 
 ful consideration. 
 
 Adjective or Adverb, which? 
 
 The quality of an object is described by using an adjec- 
 tive ; the manner of an action, by using an adverb. 
 
 Cross out the improper word in each of the following sen- 
 tences, then read the corrected sentence : 
 
 1. She walks (rapid) (rapidly). 
 
 2. The river runs (rapid) (rapidly) at that point. 
 
ADVERBS. 67 
 
 3. She was requested to walk (slow) (slowly). 
 
 4. She appears (charming) (charmingly). 
 
 5. I punished him (well) (good). 
 
 6. In the spring the woods look (beautiful) (beautifully). 
 
 7. The velvet feels (smooth) (smoothly). 
 
 8. I feel (bad) (badly) to-day. 
 
 9. She looks (angry) angrily). 
 10. She talks (loud) (loudly). 
 
 Split Infinitives. 
 
 Do not place an adverb between the parts of an infinitive. 
 Improve the following sentences : 
 
 1 . Will you ask him to kindly notify me of the time for the arrival 
 of the train. 
 
 2. I begged him to well consider the subject. 
 
 3. I wished to heartily cooperate. 
 
 Parsing. 
 
 In parsing an adverb tell : 
 
 1. The class to which it belongs. 
 
 2. The degree of comparison. 
 
 3. The use in the sentence. 
 
 Parse the adverbs in the following sentences : 
 
 1. They wept bitterly. 
 
 2. Why did they walk so rapidly ? 
 
 3. It is very wise to talk with our past hours. 
 
 4. He lived there. 
 
 5. He spoke very clearly, but quite rapidly. 
 
 6. The letter was most formally written. 
 
 7. They were too much astonished to reply immediately. 
 
 8. He soon discovered his mistake and acted accordingly. 
 
 9. He is far from home. 
 
 10. The birds flew directly over our heads. 
 
68 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 11. The postman comes twice daily. 
 
 12. Surely trouble comes soon enough. 
 
 13. The accident happened shortly after we crossed the bridge. 
 
 14. That clock always runs too fast. 
 
 15. So great a change was rarely ever seen. 
 
 16. The new building will be on a far grander scale. 
 
 17. Well, I will let you know. 
 
 18. Why, you told me so yourself. 
 
 Test Questions. — Sentence-Making. 
 
 1. What is an adverb, and what does the word mean? 
 
 2. Into how many principal classes may adverbs be 
 divided ? 
 
 3. In what respect does a conjunctive adverb differ 
 from a simple adverb ? Illustrate. 
 
 4. In what respect does a modal adverb differ from a 
 simple adverb ? 
 
 5. Show that some phrases have the value of simple 
 adverbs. Illustrate. 
 
 6. Show that some adverbs modify or throw their force 
 upon entire statements. 
 
 7. Show that a substantive clause, an adjective clause, 
 and an adverbial clause may be introduced by where. 
 
 8. Show that an adverb may modify a phrase. 
 
 9. Compare six adverbs, three of one syllable, three of 
 two syllables. 
 
 10. Derive five adverbs from adjectives. 
 
 11. Compose sentences, using in the first a clause de- 
 noting place, in the second a clause denoting time, in the 
 third a clause denoting manner, in the fourth a clause 
 denoting cause or purpose. 
 
EXERCISE VII. 
 
 Prepositions. — Conjunctions.— Interjections. 
 
 Prepositions. 
 
 A preposition is a word used to connect other words 
 and to show the relation between them. 
 
 A preposition shows a relation between two terms, — 
 an antecedent and a subsequent. The subsequent term 
 is called the object of the preposition. The object of a 
 preposition is usually a wo^?i or a. pronoun; as, 1. The house 
 on the hill is mine. 2. He went after him. 
 
 The object of a preposition may be an adjective, an 
 adverb, an infinitive, a phrase, or a clause used as a noun ; 
 as, Lift up your voice on high. Wait till then. He is about 
 to go. Wait till after the shower. Listen to what I say. 
 
 It frequently requires two or more words to express 
 the relation that a noun-term bears to the word which 
 it modifies. Such a group of words should be treated as 
 a unit. The following are examples : 
 
 Out of, from out, as to, as for, on board of, on this side, along 
 side, in front of, in spite of, by way of, by means of, because of, 
 instead of, in regard to, in respect of, for the sake of. 
 
 Such groups are called complex prepositions or preposition 
 phrases (not prepositional phrases). 
 
 Some verbs take a prepositional complement, the verb 
 and the preposition being the equivalent of a transitive 
 
 69 
 
70 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 verb ; as, He carried off the prize. The judge winked at 
 the iniquity of the decision. She laughed at the young 
 man's mistakes. 
 
 Some prepositions are restricted by their meaning and 
 by usage to definite conditions and particular combinations. 
 Thus between always implies two, and not more than two 
 related persons or things. Among implies more than two. 
 Beyond is appropriate after go, and above after rise. In is, 
 generally, quite inappropriate after verbs of motion. We 
 go into a house, and perhaps stay in it. 
 
 The correct use of prepositions can be acquired only by 
 correct thinking and practice. Clear thinking usually selects 
 the right word. The choice of a preposition depends upon 
 the exact idea to be expressed. 
 
 The following list of verbs, nouns, and adjectives, given 
 by Dr. Angus, in his Handbook of the English Tongue, shows 
 the preposition specially associated with the respective 
 words : 
 
 Accord with. 
 
 Accuse of crime by one's friend. 
 
 Acquit persons of. 
 
 Affinity to or between. 
 
 Adapted to a thing or for a pur- 
 pose. 
 
 Agreeable to ; agree with persons 
 and to things. 
 
 Attend to (listen), upon (wait). 
 
 Averse to, when describing feel- 
 ing ; from, when describing an 
 act or state. 
 
 Bestow upon. 
 
 Boast of. 
 
 Call on. 
 
 Change for. 
 
 Confer on (give), with (converse). 
 
 Confide in (when intransitive), 
 it to (when transitive). 
 
 Conformable to. 
 
 Compliance with. 
 
 Convenient to and for. 
 
 Conversant with persons ; in af- 
 fairs. 
 
 Correspond with and to. 
 
 Coupled with and by. 
 
 Dependent upon. 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 71 
 
 Derogatory to a person or thing ; 
 to derogate from authority. 
 
 Die of or by. 
 
 Differ from; a difference with a 
 person or between things. 
 
 Difficulty in. 
 
 Diminution of. 
 
 Disappointed of something we do 
 not get, in it when obtained, 
 if it does not answer our expec- 
 tations. 
 
 Disapprove of. 
 
 Discouragement to. 
 
 Dissent from. 
 
 Eager in or about. 
 
 Exceptions to or against state- 
 ments ; to except from. 
 
 Expert at or in. 
 
 Fall under or over. 
 
 Free from. 
 
 Frown at or on. 
 
 Glad of something gained ; of or 
 at what befalls another. 
 
 Independent of. 
 
 Inquire of or about. 
 
 Insist upon. 
 
 Made of or for. 
 
 Marry to. 
 
 Martyr for a cause, to a disease. 
 
 Need of. 
 
 Observance of. 
 
 Prejudicial to. 
 
 Prejudice against. 
 
 Profit by. 
 
 Provide for, with, against. 
 
 Recreant to, from. 
 
 Reconcile to. 
 
 Replete with. 
 
 Resemblance to. 
 
 Revolve on. 
 
 Reduce to order and under sub- 
 jection. 
 
 Regard for or to. 
 
 Smile at or upon. 
 
 Swerve from. 
 
 Taste of; a taste for (capacity for 
 enjoying). 
 
 Think of or on. 
 
 Thirst for or after. 
 
 True to or of. 
 
 Wait on, at, or for. 
 
 Worthy of. 
 
 In the use of a preposition inaccuracy may occur (1) in 
 choice, (2) in position, (3) in insertion or omission, (4) in 
 repetition. 
 
 Correct the following examples with reference to (1) 
 choice ; (2) position ; (3) insertion or omission ; (4) repetition. 
 
 1. The evening was followed, at night, with a storm of rain. 
 
 2. The soil is adapted for hemp and tobacco. 
 
 3. Congress consists in a Senate and in a House of Representatives. 
 
72 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 4. The government is based in republican principles. 
 
 5. The client believes that the judge is prejudiced about his cause. 
 
 6. The case has no resemblance with the other. 
 
 7. In contradistinction from the other. 
 
 8. Religion and church membership often differ very widely with 
 each other. 
 
 9. He was accused with having acted unfairly. 
 
 10. You may rely in what I say, and confide on his honesty. 
 
 11. These bonnets were brought in fashion last year. 
 
 12. The bird flew up in the tree. 
 
 13. Charles let his dollar drop in the creek. 
 
 14. It is an affair on which I am not interested. 
 
 15. He went to see his friends on horseback. 
 
 16. Habits must be acquired of temperance and self-denial. 
 
 17. He rushed into, and expired in, the flames. 
 
 18. The cost of the carriage was added to, and greatly increased 
 my account. 
 
 19. It was to your brother to whom I was mostly indebted. 
 
 20. The sycamore was fifteen feet diameter. 
 
 21. From having heard of his distress, I sent him relief. 
 
 22. My business prevented me attending the last meeting of the 
 Caledonian Society. 
 
 23. The attack is unworthy your notice. 
 
 24. San Francisco is the other side the Rocky Mountains. 
 
 25. The spring is near to the house. 
 
 26. Many talented men have deserted from the party. 
 
 27. I admit of what you say. 
 
 Conjunctions. 
 
 A conjunction is a word used to connect sentences or 
 parts of sentences. 
 
 Connectives are divided into two principal classes — coor- 
 dinate and subordinate. 
 
 Coordinate connectives are those that join words, 
 phrases, or sentences of equal rank, and are divided into 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. 73 
 
 three classes, — copulative, alternative, and adversative ; as, 
 
 1. The horse and rider fell over the precipice. 2. Come, or 
 I will go. 3. The horse fell over the precipice, but the 
 rider escaped. 
 
 A copulative conjunction is one that connects elements 
 in harmony with each other ; as, and, also, likewise, besides, 
 moreover. 
 
 An alternate conjunction is one that offers or denies 
 a choice ; as, or, nor, either, neither, else, otherwise. 
 
 An adversative conjunction is one that implies that 
 the parts connected are opposed to each other; as, but, 
 yet, only, than, lest, though, nevertheless, notwithstanding. 
 
 A causal conjunction is one that connects elements, 
 one of which is the cause, reason, or result of the other ; 
 as, for, hence, because, therefore, consequently. 
 
 Correlatives. — Either and or, with their negatives, neither 
 and nor, are called correlatives (having a mutual relation), 
 because they are generally used in pairs, introducing the 
 alternatives ; as, Dither he must leave, or I shall resign. 
 Neither this man sinned, nor his parents. 
 
 Subordinate connectives are those that join elements 
 of unequal rank; as, 1. He came when we invited him. 
 
 2. He said that he was pleased. 3. He died on the spot 
 where he fell. 
 
 Subordinate connectives are divided into three clases, — 
 those which connect substantive clauses, those which con- 
 nect adjective clauses, and those which connect adverbial 
 clauses. 
 
74 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 The principal subordinate conjunctions are that, if, lest, 
 though, after, before, since, except, until, for, because, although. 
 
 NOTE. — A subordinate connective, like a prepo- 
 sition, shows a relation of dependence. A preposi- 
 tion shows the relation between a noun or a pronoun 
 and another term. A subordinate connective shows 
 the relation of a dependent proposition to an inde- 
 pendent sentence. 
 
 A connective may consist of two or more words taken 
 together as one word ; as, 1. He called on me as if he knew 
 I would help him. 2. America has its duties as well as its 
 rights. 3. One is no longer happy as soon as he wishes 
 to be happier. Such forms are phrase conjunctions. The 
 most common of the phrase conjunctions are as if, as 
 though, as well as, as soon as, in order that, for as much as, 
 provided that, no sooner than. These forms should be 
 treated as inseparable, as one word. 
 
 Interjections. 
 
 An interjection is an exclamatory word used for the 
 purpose of expressing feeling. 
 
 The common interjections are those expressing : joy, hey, 
 huzza ; surprise, aha, hah ; attention, ho, halloo ; aversion, 
 fie, pshaw ; sorrow, alas, woe ; silence, hist, hush, mum. 
 
 Interjections are sometimes combined with other words 
 to make exclamatory phrases ; as, Ah me ! Alas the day ! 
 horror ! What ho ! for rest ! 
 
 NOTE. — As the interjection is not the sign of an 
 idea, but an expression of emotion, it cannot have any 
 definable signification or grammatical construction. 
 
PARSING. 75 
 
 Parsing. 
 
 In parsing a preposition tell : 
 
 1. The kind of phrase it introduces. 
 
 2. The tvords between which it shows a relation. 
 
 In parsing a conjunction tell : 
 
 1. The kind — coordinate or subordinate (if coordinate, 
 
 the sub-class). 
 
 2. What it connects. 
 
 Parse the prepositions and the conjunctions in the fol- 
 lowing sentences : 
 
 1. The steed along the drawbridge flies. 
 
 2. They live in a village at the foot of the mountain. 
 
 3. The trees are hoary with age. 
 
 4. There was one clear shining star that used to come out in the 
 sky before the rest, near the church spire, above the graves. 
 
 5. The highest fame was never reached except by what was aimed 
 above it. 
 
 6. I bring fresh showers for the thirsting flowers, from the seas 
 and streams. 
 
 7. Glorious indeed is the world of God around us, but more 
 glorious is the world of God within us. 
 
 8. Men must be taught as if you taught them not. 
 
 9. Come back as soon as you can. 
 
 10. Do your work, otherwise you will not get any pay. 
 
 11. Hannah, the housemaid, laughed with her eyes as she listened, 
 but governed her tongue, and was silent. 
 
 12. Neither the sunbeams, nor the birds, nor the red clouds, which 
 morning and evening sailed above him, gave the little tree any 
 pleasure. 
 
 13. What recked the chieftain if he stood 
 
 On Highland heath or Holy rood? — Scott. 
 
76 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 14. And the stars never rise but I feel the bright eyes 
 
 Of the beautiful Annabel Lee. — Poe. 
 
 15. The coming and going of the birds is more or less a mystery 
 and a surprise. 
 
 16. As for him, let him earn his living. 
 
 17. Because of his mother he was pardoned. 
 
 18. In regard to that I have nothing to say. 
 
 19. He passed along in front of you. 
 
 20. He carried off the prize. 
 
 21. She laughed at the mistake. 
 
 22. For as much as I care, he may try to do it. 
 
 23. No sooner than said, it was performed. 
 
 24. Come out of the room. 
 
 25. For the sake of your own good name abstain from the use of 
 intoxicating drinks. 
 
 Test Questions. — Sentence-Making. 
 
 1. In what important respect does a preposition differ 
 from a conjunction ? 
 
 2. Into how many principal classes are conjunctions 
 divided ? 
 
 3. Into how many sub-classes are coordinate conjunc- 
 tions divided ? 
 
 4. In what important respect does a coordinate conjunc- 
 tion differ from a subordinate conjunction ? 
 
 5. In each of four sentences, use a different relative 
 pronoun and show that it is a subordinate conjunction. 
 
 6. In each of three sentences, use a different conjunctive 
 adverb and show that it is a subordinate conjunction. 
 
 7. In each of three sentences, use a preposition phrase 
 and name the elements between which it shows a relation. 
 
 8. In the first of two sentences, use a phrase as the 
 object of a preposition, in the second, use a clause as 
 the object. 
 
TEST-QUESTIONS. 77 
 
 9. In each of two sentences, use a conjunction phrase 
 and name the elements connected. 
 
 10. What important fact distinguishes a preposition phrase 
 from a conjunction phrase ? 
 
 11. Use until as a preposition, also as a conjunction. 
 
 12. Use for as a preposition, also as a conjunction. 
 
 13. Show that an intransitive verb may take a preposi- 
 tion as a complement and that the verb-term does the work 
 of a transitive verb. 
 
 14. In each of two sentences, use an alternative conjunc- 
 tion and show that each conjunction offers or denies a choice. 
 
 15. In each of two sentences, use a different adversative 
 conjunction and show that the second part of the sentence 
 opposes the first. 
 
 16. Use thai, hence, and therefore in sentences and show 
 that the second part of each sentence is the reason or 
 result of the first part. 
 
 17. Use either and or with their correlatives neither and 
 nor and show their mutual dependence. 
 
 18. Use but as a preposition, also as a conjunction. 
 
 19. Use after as a preposition, also as a conjunction. 
 
 20. In connection with the first of two simple sentences, 
 use an interjection which expresses joy ; in the second, use 
 an interjection which expresses sorroio. 
 
 21. In connection with each of two simple sentences, 
 use a different exclamatory phrase. 
 
EXERCISE VIII. 
 
 Grammatical Terms. — General View. 
 
 As the sentence is the unit of expression, a knowledge of 
 its structure is essential to a clear expression of thought. 
 
 A grammatical term is a word, or a group of related 
 words, that performs a distinct office in the structure of a 
 sentence. 
 
 There are four principal grammatical terms, — noun-terms, 
 adjective-terms, verb-terms, and adverb-terms. 
 
 Noun-Terms. 
 
 A noun is a word used as a name. A noun-term is a 
 word, or group of related words, that is used as a noun. 
 In form it may be a word, a phrase, or a clause ; as God is 
 love. Helping others helps ourselves. To save time is to 
 lengthen life. That music hath charms is true. He replied, 
 / have recited. My home is wherever I am happy. You err 
 in that you think so. 
 
 Adjective-Terms. 
 
 An adjective is a word used to limit the meaning of a 
 noun. An adjective-term is a word, or group of related 
 words, that is used as an adjective. In form it may be a 
 word, a phrase, or a clause; as, Good boys are obedient. 
 Men of culture may be happy. An adjective clause is one 
 
 that describes or limits a substantive. 
 
 78 
 
VERB-TERMS. 79 
 
 Verb-Terms. 
 
 A verb is a word used to assert something of a person or 
 a thing. A verb-term is a word, or group of related words, 
 that is used as a verb. In form it may be a single word, or 
 a verb-phrase ; as, He is. Flowers bloom. He should have 
 been rewarded. 
 
 Adverb-Terms. 
 
 An adverb is a word used to modify the meaning of a 
 verb, an adjective, or another adverb. An adverb-term is 
 a word, or group of related words, that is used as an adverb. 
 In form it may be a word, a phrase, or a clause; as, He came 
 early. We will return in the morning. He came ichen you 
 called him. She lies where first the sunbeams fall. 
 
 NOTES.— I. The sum is this : The noun-term, the 
 adjective-term, and the adverb- term have only three 
 forms each, — the word-form, the phrase-form, and 
 the clause-form. In each form, the term does the 
 ■work of a single part of speech. 
 
 n. Any word, phrase, clause, mark, or symbol, 
 which may be made the subject of a verb, or the ob- 
 ject of a verb, a participle, an infinitive, a preposition, 
 or the substantive complement of a copulative verb, 
 is a noun-term. It is an object conception and is 
 grasped by the mind as an entirety. 
 
 m. Whatever describes or limits a noun or a 
 pronoun is an adjective-term. It is a quality concep- 
 tion in distinction from an object conception. The 
 adjective-term, like the noun-term, is regarded by the 
 mind as one descriptive or limiting term. 
 
 IV. Whatever modifies a verb, a verb-phrase, an 
 adjective, or an adverb is an adverb-term. The mind 
 graps it as a single term. 
 
 V. The verb-term is always a verb, or some other 
 part of speech used as a verb. If the verb is com- 
 
80 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 pie ted by a noun (telling -what the subject is), or by 
 an adjective (describing the subject), the noun-term 
 or the adjective-term thus used is the true predicate. 
 
 VI. The word-form of a grammatical term is a 
 single ■word. 
 
 VII. The phrase-form of a grammatical term con- 
 sists of a preposition or a participle combined with 
 a significant word or group of related words used as 
 a single part of speech. The phrase-form of a gram- 
 matical term is always used as a noun, an adjective, 
 or an adverb. 
 
 VTH. The clause-form of a grammatical term is 
 a dependent sentence. It does the work of a noun, 
 an adjective, or an adverb. 
 
 Test Questions.— Sentence-Making. 
 
 1. What is meant by the phrase, a grammatical termf 
 
 2. What is a noun-term ? 
 
 3. How many forms has the noun-term ? 
 
 4. What is an adjective-term ? 
 
 5. How many forms has the adjective-term? 
 
 6. What is a verb-term ? 
 
 7. How many forms has the verb-term ? 
 
 8. In the first of two simple sentences, use a single verb ; 
 in the second, use a verb-phrase. 
 
 9. What is an adverb-term ? 
 
 10. How many forms has the adverb-term ? 
 
 11. In each of three sentences, use a different form of the 
 noun-term. 
 
 12. In the same sentence, use the three forms of the ad- 
 jective-term. 
 
 13. In the same sentence, use the three forms of the ad- 
 verb-term. 
 
EXERCISE IX. 
 
 The Sentence.— Use. — Structure. 
 
 A sentence is a group of words expressing a thought ; as, 
 The laws of nature are the thoughts of the Creator. 
 
 Every sentence consists of two parts, — a subject and a 
 predicate. 
 
 The subject of a sentence is the part of the sentence 
 about which something is said ; as, The laws of nature are 
 the thoughts of the Creator. 
 
 The predicate of a sentence is the part of the sentence 
 that expresses what is said about the subject ; as, The laws 
 of nature are the thoughts of the Creator. 
 
 Sentences are classified with regard to use, also with re- 
 gard to structure. 
 
 I. According to their use, they are classified as declara- 
 tive, interrogative, imperative, and exclamatory. 
 
 A declarative sentence is one that declares or tells some- 
 thing; as, Heaven from all creatures hides the book of fate. 
 
 An interrogative sentence is one that asks a question : 
 as, Does one always reap what he sows ? 
 
 An imperative sentence is one that expresses a request 
 or a command ; as, Get me permission to go home. 
 
 An exclamatory sentence is one that expresses emotion 
 or surprise ; as, How like a villain he looks ! 
 
 6 81 
 
82 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 II. According to their structure sentences are classified as 
 simple, complex, and compound. 
 
 A simple sentence is one that contains only one asser- 
 tion ; as, Integrity of purpose is always admired. 
 
 A complex sentence is one that contains one principal 
 assertion and one or more subordinate assertions ; as, The 
 task, which was assigned him, was too difficult. 
 
 A compound sentence is one that contains two or more 
 coordinate assertions ; as, Time is more valuable than 
 money, but few recognize the fact. 
 
 Test Questions. — Sentence-Making. 
 
 TO THE TEACHER : In every recitation the most 
 inspiring, illustrative sentences, original or quoted, 
 should be written upon the blackboard for the in- 
 spection of the class. Pupils do not study grammar 
 merely to learn how to imprison sentences in dia- 
 grams, analyze sentences, and parse words mechani- 
 cally, but to learn to express their own thoughts 
 clearly, concisely, and logically. 
 
 As mind is developed only by what it creates and 
 uses, the pupil should be required to use a grammati- 
 cal fact in original sentences as soon as he has 
 learned it. This method requires the pupil to review 
 what he has gone over and to compose sentences. 
 It tends to impress on him the fact that he must 
 get understanding while he is getting information, 
 Insist upon thoughtful illustrations. Exact and ac- 
 cept only such illustrative sentences, original and 
 quoted, as show a careful preparation of the lesson 
 on the part of the class. Teachers should ever bear 
 in mind the fact that there is nothing inspiring or 
 lasting in merely formal recitations. The aim is to 
 make these exercises interesting and profitable by 
 omitting detail, and presenting only points of general 
 
THE SENTENCE. 83 
 
 importance. They compel thought but do not tax 
 the memory. A grammatical relation applied in the 
 construction of original sentences "will be remem- 
 bered long after technical terms are forgotten. The 
 use of language should accompany the study of its 
 structure. The exercises are a complete review of 
 the text, and should be made topics for real language 
 lessons — oral and written. 
 
 1. In what respect does a complex sentence differ from 
 a compound sentence ? 
 
 2. In what respect does a compound sentence differ from 
 a simple sentence ? 
 
 3. In what respect does a declarative sentence differ 
 from an exclamatory sentence ? 
 
 4. In what respect does an interrogative sentence differ 
 from an imperative sentence ? 
 
 5. In what respect does an exclamatory sentence differ 
 from the other kinds of sentences in regard to use ? 
 
 6. In what does a simple sentence differ from a com- 
 plex sentence ? 
 
 7. Compose three simple sentences. 
 
 8. Compose three complex sentences. 
 
 9. Compose three compound sentences. 
 
 10. Compose three compound-complex sentences. 
 
 11. Connect the two members of a compound sentence 
 with and, with also, with besides. 
 
EXERCISE X. 
 
 Phrases. 
 
 A phrase is a group of words not containing subject and 
 predicate and used as a noun, an adjective, or an adverb. 
 
 According to their uses, phrases are classified as substan- 
 tive, adjective, and adverbial. 
 
 A substantive phrase is one used as a noun ; as, 1. To 
 do right is a duty. 2. He likes to study arithmetic. 3. My 
 purpose is to finish the work. 
 
 An adjective phrase is one used as an adjective ; as, 1. 
 The laws of nature are the thoughts of God. 2. He has a 
 library filled with rare books. 3. A ship, gliding over the 
 water, is a beautiful sight. 
 
 An adverbial phrase is one that is used as an adverb ; 
 as, 1. The birds will return in the spring. 2. I shall be 
 glad to see you. 3. Believing in him, he trusted him. 
 
 Phrases are also distinguished with regard to form, as 
 prepositional, participial, and infinitive. 
 
 A prepositional phrase consists of a preposition and its 
 object; as, The children in the grove are happy. He came 
 to town yesterday. 
 
 An infinitive phrase is one introduced by to followed by 
 a verb ; as, To love is to live. To launch the boat was a long 
 and pleasant task. 
 
 84 
 
PHRASES. 85 
 
 A participial phrase is one introduced by a participle and 
 used as an adjective ; as, 1. Forsaken by his friends, he was 
 defeated. 2. Truth, crushed to earth, will rise again. 
 3. Caesar, having arrived, decided to cross the Rhine. 
 
 Phrases are also distinguished as simple, complex, com- 
 pound, independent, and idiomatic. 
 
 A simple phrase is a single, unmodified phrase ; as, He 
 came to town yesterday. Heaven hides the book of fate. 
 
 A complex phrase is a modified phrase ; as, Pines grow 
 on the very tops of the highest mountains. 
 
 A compound phrase is composed of two or more phrases 
 of equal rank ; as, We should learn to labor and to wait. 
 
 A phrase may be wholly independent in meaning and in 
 grammar ; as, To say the truth, he was a conscientious man. 
 To make a long story short, the company disbanded. 
 
 An idiomatic phrase is one peculiar to a language. The 
 relation of an idiomatic phrase to the sentence with which 
 it is used is logical, not grammatical. Our language abounds 
 in idiomatic phrases ; as, As yet, by far, at last, at first, at 
 present, at random, by the by, out and out, side by side, hand 
 to hand, through and through, year by year, etc. 
 
 From the foregoing discussion we glean the following im- 
 portant facts : 
 
 1. That a prepositional phrase may be used as an adjec- 
 tive or as an adverb. 
 
 2. That an infinitive phrase may be used as a noun, an 
 adjective, or adverb. 
 
 3. That phrases are used as parts of speech, and should 
 be regarded as units. 
 
86 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Test Questions — Sentence-Making. 
 
 1. What is a phrase in grammar? 
 
 2. With regard to use, how are phrases classified ? 
 
 3. What is a substantive phrase ? 
 
 4. In each of three simple sentences, use a substantive 
 phrase in different grammatical relation. 
 
 5. What is an adjective phrase? 
 
 6. In each of two sentences, use an adjective phrase in 
 a different relation. 
 
 7. Show that an adjective of the word-form may be 
 substituted for an adjective of the phrase-form. 
 
 8. What is an adverbial phrase ? 
 
 9. In each of two sentences, use an adverbial phrase. 
 
 10. In the first of three sentences, use a phrase denoting 
 time ; in the second, one denoting place ; in the third, one 
 denoting manner. 
 
 11. With regard to form, how are phrases classified ? 
 
 12. What is a prepositional phrase ? 
 
 13. Show that a prepositional phrase may be used as an 
 adjective or as an adverb. 
 
 14. What is an infinitive phrase ? 
 
 15. Use an infinitive phrase (1) as a noun ; (2) as an ad- 
 jective ; (3) as an adverb. 
 
 16. Use an infinitive phrase (1) as the object of a verb; 
 (2) as the complement of a verb ; (3) as the object of a par- 
 ticiple ; (4) as the object of a preposition. 
 
 17. In each of two sentences, use a simple phrase. 
 
 18. In each of two sentences, use a complex phrase. 
 
 19. In a simple sentence, use a compound phrase. 
 
 20. Use two independent phrases. 
 
EXERCISE XL 
 
 Clauses, 
 
 A clause is a group of words containing subject and 
 predicate and used as a noun, an adjective, or an adverb. 
 
 According to their uses, clauses are classified as substan- 
 tive, adjective, and adverbial. 
 
 A substantive clause is one used as a noun ; as, 1. 
 That might makes right is untrue. 2. See how the leaves 
 have turned. 3. The belief is that the soul is immortal. 
 
 NOTE. — A substantive clause -when used as the 
 subject of a verb, the object of a verb, or the com- 
 plement of a copulative verb, is dependent on the 
 rest of the sentence for its meaning-. 
 
 An adjective clause is one used as an adjective ; as, 1. 
 The boy, who was here, is my son. 2. I know something 
 which I wish to tell you. 3. He dreamed of the place where 
 in youth he had played. 4. Samuel Morse is the man that 
 invented the telegraph. 
 
 An adverbial clause is one used as an adverb ; as, 1. 
 He left before you returned. 2. I am glad that you came. 
 3. He came earlier than he was expected. 
 
 NOTE. — On account of its extent and frequent 
 use, the adverbial clause merits special notice. An 
 absolute classification cannot be made, as the 
 clauses shade into one another in meaning. It is 
 believed, however, that the classification here given 
 is sufficiently critical for all practical purposes. 
 
 87 
 
88 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 An adverbial clause may denote time, place, manner, degree, 
 cause, result. 
 
 Time; as, 1. Work while it is yet to-day. 2. Rich gifts 
 wax poor when givers prove unkind. 3. He was killed while 
 he was on picket duty. 
 
 Place; as, 1. He was welcome wherever he went. 2. 
 Wheresoever the carcass is, there the buzzards are. 
 
 Manner; as, 1. As is the teacher, so is the school. 2. 
 He died as he had lived. 3. He worked as if his life 
 depended upon it. 
 
 Degree; as, 1. They all became wiser than they were. 
 2. We rise in glory as we sink in pride. 
 
 Cause; as, 1. He is studious, for he knows his lesson. 2. 
 I shall read the book, since you recommend it. 
 
 Result ; as, He behaved so badly that he was expelled. 
 
 Like Uses of Phrases and Clauses. 
 
 As phrases and clauses are used in the construction 
 of sentences as nouns, adjectives, and adverbs, it is very 
 important that the several forms and uses of these two 
 grammatical terms should be thoroughly understood by 
 the pupil. Logically they are regarded as parts of speech, 
 because they are used as parts of speech. The mind 
 grasps them and uses them as units, as wholes. 
 
 I. As Nouns. 
 
 Each may be used in at least six grammatical relations 
 as nouns : (1) as the subject of a verb ; (2) as the object of 
 a verb ; (3) as the complement of a copulative verb ; (4) 
 
CLAUSES. 89 
 
 as the object of a preposition ; (5) as the object of an infini- 
 tive ; (6) as the object of a participle. 
 
 As Subject: 1. To do right is a duty. 2. That music 
 hath charms is not denied. 
 
 As Object: 1. He likes to sing. 2. He said " Come 
 to see me." 
 
 As Complement : 1. To love is to live. 2. The home is 
 wherever the heart is. 
 
 As Object of a Preposition : 1. I am about to close the 
 recitation. 2. He succeeds in whatever he undertakes. 
 
 As Object of an Infinitive : 1. To think about going 
 home is pleasant. 2. To believe that most men are honest is 
 encouraging. 
 
 As Object of a Participle : 1. Expecting to see you, I 
 tarried. 2. Having said, Grant won the battle, he retired. 
 
 II. As Adjectives. 
 
 An adjective phrase or an adjective clause may limit a 
 noun or a pronoun anywhere in the sentence. 
 
 1. A statue of marble was chiselled by an artist. 
 
 2. He climbed to the top of the mountain. 
 
 3. He is a man of great wealth. 
 
 4. I am on my way to the city of St. Louis, which is situated on 
 the Mississippi River. 
 
 5. I saw him of great renown. 
 
 6. I saw him that has great renown, etc. 
 
 HI. As Adverbs. 
 
 An adverbial phrase or an adverbial clause may modify 
 a verb, a verb-phrase, or an adjective. 
 
90 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 1. He came in the morning. 
 
 2. He came after I invited him. 
 
 3. He will come in the afternoon. 
 
 4. He will come when we send for him. 
 
 5. I am glad to see you. 
 
 6. I am glad that you are here. 
 
 NOTE. — The pupil will note that phrases are 
 introduced by prepositions and participles, and that 
 clauses are introduced by relative pronouns and 
 conjunctive adverbs. He will also note that the 
 second term or subsequent of a phrase is always a 
 noun or. an element used as a noun, and that the 
 second term of a clause — the term immediately fol- 
 lowing the connective — is always a proposition, a 
 dependent sentence, a limiting expression ; it is 
 unlike the part with which it is connected in its 
 form, in its rank, and in its grammatical character. 
 
 Test Questions. — Sentence-Making. 
 
 1. Define a clause. 
 
 2. In what respect are phrases and clauses alike ? 
 
 3. In what respect are phrases and clauses unlike ? 
 
 4. Use a substantive clause (1) as the subject of a verb ; 
 (2) as the object of a verb ; (3) as the complement of a 
 copulative verb. 
 
 5. Use a substantive clause (1) as the object of a prep- 
 osition ; (2) as the object of an infinitive. 
 
 6. Introduce a substantive clause with why, with who. 
 
 7. Introduce an adjective clause with that, with who. 
 
 8. Use an adverbial clause (1) to modify a single verb ; 
 
 (2) to modify a verb-phrase ; (3) to modify an adjective. 
 
 9. Introduce an adverbial clause with when, with where. 
 10. Use a clause (1) to denote time; (2) to denote place; 
 
 (3) to denote manner ; (4) to denote purpose. 
 
EXERCISE XII. 
 
 Copula. — Complement. — Object. 
 
 TO TEACHER AND PUPIL : A clear understand- 
 ing of the nature of the copula verb and the comple- 
 ments used with it to form complete predicates is 
 absolutely necessary in order to grasp the meaning 
 of the sentence. 
 
 A copula verb is a verb that merely asserts an attribute 
 of a noun. It joins together in logical union the subject and 
 the predicate of a proposition. 
 
 In every proposition there are three terms, — the subject, 
 the verb, and the predicate. The subject is the person or 
 the thing about which something is asserted ; the predicate 
 is the thing or the quality that limits the subject ; the verb 
 is the word that asserts. In the proposition, " The apple is 
 nutritious, 11 the word apple is that about which something 
 is asserted, hence it is the subject ; nutritious is the quality 
 affirmed of the apple, hence it is the predicate ; is, is the 
 asserting word, the word that joins the predicate to the sub- 
 ject, hence it is the copula. 
 
 The complement of a copulative verb is the word, phrase 
 or clause that completes the meaning of the verb. Comple- 
 ments are of two kinds, — adjective complements and noun 
 complements. 
 
 An adjective complement is an adjective-term used with 
 
 a verb to complete its meaning; as, 1. He is sick. 2. He 
 
 seems happy. 3. She is in poor health. 
 
 91 
 
92 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 A noun complement is a noun-term used with a verb 
 to complete its meaning ; as, 1, He is a good man. 2. It is 
 a tree. 3. He is to improve. 4. The home is wherever the 
 heart is. 5. The belief is that the soul is immortal. 
 
 NOTES.— I. The phrase-form of the complement 
 may be any phrase -which is the equivalent of a pred- 
 icate adjective ; as, He is in misery — he is miserable. 
 He is at liberty — he is free. Time is of great value — time is 
 valuable. But not all phrases which follow the verb to 
 be, are complement terms; as, He is in Texas (adv.). 
 The work done by the phrase in the special sentence 
 must determine whether it is a complement-term or 
 an adverb-term. 
 
 II. The clause-form of the substantive comple- 
 ment of a copulative verb may be any clause that 
 does the work of a noun ; as, The fact is that he came. 
 The question is how can he be saved. The condition is if 
 the enemy attempt to cross the river. The point is what is to be 
 done first. The home is wherever the heart is. 
 
 HI. The adjective complement denotes a quality 
 conception; as, John is happy. Sugar is sweet. The 
 noun complement denotes an object conception ; as, 
 It is a horse. Elizabeth was queen. 
 
 IV. The verb-form always embraces two distinct 
 constituents, — copula, complement. In attributive 
 verbs, both of these parts are incorporated into one 
 word. Attributive verbs not only assert, they indicate 
 what is asserted ; as, He ivalks — he is walking. 
 
 V. "When the attribute is an action, it blends with 
 the verb and both are used as one word ; as, The boy 
 is running. He was killed. The field was ploughed. "When 
 the copula is combined with the present participle, the 
 two constitute the progressive form of the verb ; when 
 combined with the past participle, they constitute the 
 passive voice form of the verb. 
 
 VI. Sometimes the copula and complement do 
 the work of a single verb ; as, I am of the opinion ; that 
 is, I believe. 
 
COMPLEMENTS. 93 
 
 VII. The copula may be a verb-phrase; as, He 
 might have been chairman of the meeting. He should have 
 been punished. 
 
 Vm. Many verb-phrases in the passive voice are 
 used as copulas ; as, He was elected chairman. He was 
 considered honest. 
 
 The object of a transitive verb is the word or group of 
 words which shows what the action expressed by the verb 
 affects. It is always a noun-term. In form it may be a 
 word, & phrase, or a clause ; as, The mother loves her child. 
 He likes to read. Columbus proved that the earth is round. 
 
 Unlike Uses of Complements and Objects. 
 
 TO THE TEACHER : The pupil should be trained 
 to see at a glance the use of a grammatical term. A 
 complement, whether a word, a phrase, or a clause, 
 completes the verb by referring to the subject. An 
 object, whether a word, a phrase, or a clause, com- 
 pletes the meaning of the verb by showing what the 
 action expressed by the verb affects. A complement 
 is an attribute, a descriptive element, logically an 
 adjective. An object is a noun, a modifier of the 
 verb, it limits the verb. A few illustrations will make 
 these facts clear. 
 
 Complements : 1. It is X 2. It is she. 3. The milk is 
 sour. 4. He is dead. 5. She is in poor health. 6. The 
 coin is of value. 7. John seems to be angry. 8. He is in 
 much pain. 9. To love is to live. 10. Seeing is believing. 
 11. The home is wherever the heart is. 12. Your friend is 
 whoever needs your help. 12. The belief is that he is guilty. 
 
 Objects: 1. He saw me. 2. I saw her. 3. I like him. 
 4. He loves to study. 5. She learned to think. 6. He said, 
 " Come here, John." 7. I believe that every one is the archi- 
 tect of his own fortune. 
 
94 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 In the following sentences the pupil will pick out (1) the 
 verb-term; (2) the complement or object; (3) if the verb- 
 term is completed by an attribute (complement), he will 
 show that it refers to the subject ; (4) if the verb-term is 
 completed by an object (complement), he will explain that 
 it shows what the action expressed by the verb affects. 
 
 1. He is industrious. 
 
 2. She seems impatient. 
 
 3. He seeks fame. 
 
 4. The teacher said, ' ' To-morrow I shall explain this principle 
 more fully." 
 
 5. He is in doubt. 
 
 6. God said, "Let there be light." 
 
 7. His purpose was to surprise the enemy. 
 
 8. John became studious. 
 
 9. Learn to economize the value of time. 
 
 10. Franklin said, "Take care of your dimes, dollars will take care 
 of themselves." 
 
 11. Believe that man is immortal. 
 
 12. To purloin is to steal. 
 
 13. Another mistake in relation to happiness is that we make pro- 
 vision only for the present world. 
 
 14. That letter is h. 
 
 15. The question is, who will put the bell on the dog. 
 
 16. " Talent is something, but tact is everything." 
 
 17. The tree is tall. 
 
 18. He was my friend. 
 
 19. He ordered the soldiers to march. 
 
 20. The order was to march at once. 
 
 21. To obey is to enjoy. 
 
 22. His desire is to obey. 
 
 23. He likes to obey. 
 
 24. The velvet feels smooth. 
 
 25. I am in a hurry. 
 
TEST QUESTIONS. 95 
 
 Test Questions. — Sentence-Making. 
 
 1. What is meant by the word copula in grammar ? 
 
 2. In what important respect does a copula verb differ 
 from an attributive verb ? 
 
 3. In how many ways may the complement of a verb 
 refer to the subject of the sentence ? 
 
 4. What does the adjective complement denote? 
 
 5. In each of three simple sentences, use a different ad- 
 jective complement, word-form. 
 
 6. In each of two simple sentences, use an adjective 
 complement, phrase-form. 
 
 7. What does a noun complement denote ? 
 
 8. In the first of three sentences, use a noun comple- 
 ment, word-form ; in the second, a noun complement, phrase- 
 form ; in the third, a noun complement, clause-form. 
 
 9. In the first of three sentences, use a noun-term, word- 
 form, as the object of a verb ; in the second, use a noun- 
 term, phrase-form, as the object of a verb ; in the third, use 
 a noun-term, clause-form, as the object of a verb. 
 
 10. Introduce an adjective complement with in, with of. 
 
 11. Introduce a noun complement, clause-form, with that, 
 
 with where, with how. 
 
 12. Use as objects of verbs clauses introduced by that, 
 
 where, with, how. 
 
 13. In each of three sentences, use a different attributive 
 verb, and show that each verb is equal in meaning to copula 
 and complement. 
 
 14. Show that the complement of a copula verb is the 
 significant predicate element. 
 
 15. State the difference between the noun complement of 
 a copulative verb and the object of a transitive verb. 
 
EXERCISE XIII. 
 
 Peculiar Uses of Nouns and Adjectives. 
 
 A word has a peculiar use when it varies, in construction, 
 from its usual classification, meaning, or relation. 
 
 1. A noun so related to a verb as to show to whom or 
 for whom an act was performed is called an indirect object; 
 as, 1. He gave his son a watch. 2. Please find Mary a bet- 
 ter pen. 3. He made the captain a hat. 
 
 2. A noun so related to the object of a verb as to de- 
 scribe it, is called an objective attribute; as, 1. They chose 
 her queen. 2. He called him a coward. 
 
 3. A noun used like an adverb to denote time, distance, 
 value, weight, etc., is called an adverbial objective; as, 1. He 
 waited an hour. 2. He walked a mile. 3. The coal weighed 
 a ton. 4. The fish was worth a dollar. 
 
 4. A noun used as the object of an intransitive verb is 
 called a. cognate object; as, 1. He looked a last look. 2. He 
 ran a race. 3. He dreamed a dream. 
 
 5. A noun used with a participle and known as the 
 nominative absolute is the subject of an abridged adverbial 
 clause ; as, 1. The battle being over, the army was disbanded. 
 When the battle was over, the army was disbanded. 2. The 
 rain having ceased, we resumed our journey. When the 
 rain had ceased, we resumed our journey. 
 
 1. An adjective joined to a verb that expresses condition 
 or motion modifies both the subject and the predicate, and 
 
 96 
 
PECULIAR USES OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 97 
 
 is called an adverbial, predicate adjective; as, 1. He came 
 running. 2. He died shouting. 3. The sun shines bright. 
 
 2. An adjective joined to a verb in such a way as to 
 qualify the direct object of the verb is called an objective 
 attribute; as, 1. She wiped the dishes dry. 2. He painted 
 the house red. 3. He made the stick straight. 
 
 3. An adjective that follows the noun it describes is 
 called an appositive adjective; as, 1. She, dying, gave it to 
 me. 2. The man, beaten, fled. 
 
 4. An adjective is often used as a noun ; as, 1. The 
 brave deserve the fair. 2. Choose the true, the beautiful, 
 and the good. 
 
 TO THE TEACHER : This is the proper place to 
 construe other unusual expressions found in the 
 ■writings of distinguished authors. Require the 
 pupils to give the construction of the words, 
 phrases, and clauses printed in italics in the fol- 
 lowing sentences : 
 
 1. Come. 
 
 2. The man was without power to move. 
 
 3. The clouds hang heavy and low. 
 
 4. The milk seems sour. 
 
 5. Jack has worn his shoes thin. 
 
 6. They elected him mayor. 
 
 7. She came to the house weeping. 
 
 8. Peter, the hermit, lived in a cave. 
 
 9. I am glad of it. 
 
 10. While away your time. 
 
 11. The doctors pronounced the disease incurable. 
 
 12. As the tree falls, so it must lie. 
 
 13. Tenderly her blue eyes glistened, long time ago. 
 
 14. He is sorry for what he has done. 
 
 15. She wrings the clothes dry. 
 
 7 
 
98 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 16. The owl is a nocturnal bird, pursuing its prey by night and 
 sleeping during the daytime. 
 
 17. To carry care to bed is to sleep with a pack on your back. 
 
 18. There Honor comes, a pilgrim gray, 
 
 To deck the turf that wraps their clay. — Collins. 
 
 19. The Spartans called their slaves Helots. 
 
 20. I found the urchin, Cupid, sleeping. 
 
 21. strong hearts and true ! not one went back in the ' ' Mayflower. ' 1 
 
 22. Silently, one by one, in the infinite meadows of heaven, 
 Blossomed the lovely stars, the forget-me-nots of the angels. 
 
 23. The ruby-throated humming-bird — the loveliest one of the whole 
 family — is a native of the Southern States. 
 
 24. Blessed is he who has found his work ; let him ask no other 
 blessedness. — Carlyle. 
 
 25. Up rose old Barbara Frietchie then 
 
 Bowed with her four score years and ten. — Whittier. 
 
 26. The soldiers nicknamed Jackson " Old Hickory." 
 
 27. To hear is to learn. 
 
 28. He ran a mile. 
 
 29. Seeing is believing. 
 
 30. Stars shine on. 
 
 31. He made the captain a coat. 
 
 32. Seeing a crowd in the street, he ran to the door. 
 
 33. The spider, spinning his web, was an inspiration to Bruce. 
 
 34. The man, resting by the roadside, found a purse. 
 
 35. On the quarter-deck of the flag-ship stood Admiral Sir John 
 Narborough, the first seaman in all England. 
 
 36. He was elected President of the United States. 
 
 37. My little family were gathered around a charming fire, telling 
 stories of the past and laying schemes for the future. 
 
 38. See here, my son. 
 
 39. To retreat was difficult ; to advance, impossible. 
 
 40. Firing a gun is dangerous sometimes. 
 
 41. The sun appears to beat in vain at the casements. 
 
 42. I wished to enter college and hoped to receive aid from my uncle, 
 
 43. Who has not heard the crying of children? 
 
 44. This is the factory where my brother works. 
 
TEST QUESTIONS. ' /'■'•, ; ., , ; R*9& \\\ 
 
 45. The prisoner was sent back to the place whence he came. 
 
 46. Many are called, but few are chosen. 
 
 47. Which one do you want? 
 
 48. He gave his son a book. 
 
 49. John, shut the door. 
 
 50. Loving is living. 
 
 51. I want him £o ^o Aorae. 
 
 52. Grant, £Ae silent raan, was a great general. 
 
 53. Earth's highest station ends in, "Here he lies.'''' 
 
 Test Questions. — Sentence-Making. 
 
 1. When has a word a peculiar use ? 
 
 2. In how many ways may a noun be related to a verb ? 
 
 3. What is meant by the phrase objective attribute f 
 
 4. Show that a noun used as the indirect object of a 
 verb is really the object of a preposition understood. 
 
 5. What is meant by cognate object f Illustrate. 
 
 6. In each of three sentences, use a noun as the indirect 
 object of a verb. 
 
 7. Use a noun as an objective attribute. 
 
 8. Use a noun as an adverbial objective. 
 
 9. Use a noun as a cognate object. 
 
 10. In each of three sentences, use a noun as an absolute 
 nominative, and show that a noun so used is the subject of 
 an abridged, adverbial clause. 
 
 11. In each of three sentences, use an adjective to modify 
 both the subject and the predicate. 
 
 12. In each of three sentences, use an adjective as an 
 objective attribute. 
 
 13. Use two adjectives appositively. 
 
EXERCISE XIV. 
 
 Verbals. — Infinitives. — Participles. 
 
 Besides the inflected and asserting forms of the verb 
 already given, there are two kinds of words called verbals 
 derived from every principal verb. They are not really 
 verbs, because they do not assert anything ; they merely 
 express action in a general way. They are used as nouns 
 and adjectives, and are called infinitives and participles. 
 
 Infinitives. 
 
 An infinitive is the form of a verb having the properties 
 of a noun and a verb. 
 
 Infinitives are verbal nouns, — that is, they have the con- 
 struction of nouns ; as, 1. To do good was his aim. 2. He 
 likes to read Latin. 3. Walking is good exercise. 4. Seeing 
 is believing. 
 
 Infinitives are of two classes, — root infinitives and parti- 
 cipial infinitives. 
 
 The root infinitive is the simplest form of the verb ; 
 as, love, live, go, work. 
 
 The participial infinitive ends in ing" ; as, loving, living, 
 going, working. 
 
 Infinitives, like finite verbs, may take : 
 
 1. Adverbial modifiers; as, Resolve to live honorably. 
 
 We expect to start in the morning. We intend to go when 
 
 our friends arrive. 
 100 
 

 INFINITIVES. ] (XI, 
 
 2. Objects ; as, To help others is a duty. The man seems 
 to believe what he says. 
 
 3. Complements ; as, The boy seems to be studious. 
 His one desire is to become a soldier. 
 
 An infinitive phrase may be used as : 
 
 1. The subject of a verb ; as, To err is human. To watch 
 him is his duty. 
 
 2. The object of a verb ; as, We wish to study geog- 
 raphy. Learn to labor and to wait. 
 
 3. The complement of a copulative verb ; as, To see 
 is to believe. All we want is to be set free. 
 
 4. An adjective ; as, A desire to learn is commendable. 
 Air to breathe is a necessity. 
 
 5. An adverb; as, He studied to learn. I Avas sorry 
 to miss him. 
 
 6. The object of a participle; as, Fearing to start, we 
 waited too long. The mother, trying to rescue her child, 
 lost her own life. 
 
 NOTE. — An infinitive phrase used as the object 
 of a participle has the construction of an abstract 
 noun in the objective case. 
 
 7. The object of a preposition ; as, He is about to join 
 the army. He is willing to do anything but (to) work. 
 
 NOTE. — An infinitive phrase used as the object 
 of a preposition has the construction of an abstract 
 noun in the objective case. 
 
 8. In apposition with a noun ; as, Delightful task ! to rear 
 the tender thought. A wise decision — to decide impartially. 
 
 NOTE. — An infinitive phrase is in apposition with 
 a noun when it means the same thing as the noun. 
 
102 ENGLISH GRAMMAR, 
 
 9. With an assumed subject, as the object of a verb ; 
 as, We expected him to come. 
 
 NOTE. — The simple infinitives include the root 
 of the verb, called the root infinitive, and the infini- 
 tive ending in ing, called the participial infinitive; 
 as, Root-infinitives: give, have, be; Participial infini- 
 tives: giving, having, being. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 A participle is the form of a verb having the properties 
 of an adjective and a verb. 
 
 Participles are verbal adjectives — that is, they have the 
 construction of adjectives ; as, 1. The man, skating on the 
 ice, is my brother. 2. He has a library filled with rare books. 
 3. John, having recited all his lessons, went to the country. 
 
 There are two participles, — the present participle and the 
 past participle. 
 
 The present participle ends in ing; as, I saw a man 
 walking in the meadow. People, living in a busy city, long 
 for a quiet country home. 
 
 The past participle ends in d, n, or t ; as, John, having 
 recited his lesson, went to the country. Having been driven 
 from home, he enlisted in the army. He, having slept too 
 late, missed the train. 
 
 A compound participle consists of being, having, or 
 having been, and a present or past participle placed after it ; 
 as, Caesar, having sent forward his cavalry, followed. Having 
 finished his speech, he sat down. 
 
 Participles are often used as attributive adjectives; as, 
 Her charming voice captured the audience. 
 
PARTICIPLES. 103 
 
 A participle may be used as a simple predicate adjective ; 
 as, He is fatigued. He is deserted. 
 
 NOTE. — A simple participle used as a predicate 
 adjective does not form with the verb a verb-phrase, 
 but is a predicate adjective merely, and should be 
 parsed like any other qualifying adjective. 
 
 Participles are often used as nouns ; as, He spoke of the 
 living and the dead; the tempted and the tried; the lost, 
 buried, and forgotten. 
 
 A participle, in its appropriate use, takes the place of an 
 adjective clause ; as, 
 
 And children coming home from school 
 Look in at the open door. 
 
 And children that come home from school look in at the 
 
 open door. 
 
 Up rose old Barbara Frietchie then, 
 Bowed with her fourscore years and ten. 
 
 Then up rose old Barbara Frietchie, who was bowed with 
 her fourscore years and ten. 
 
 The attributive complement of a participle qualifies the 
 word that the phrase limits ; as, Being tired, I decline. 
 Having been ill, he was unable to go. 
 
 The substantive complement of a participle is in apposi- 
 tion with the noun that the phrase limits ; as, John, being 
 a hero, saved the child. He, having been a merchant, took 
 an invoice, or account of stock. 
 
 A participle may do the work of both an adjective and 
 an adverb in the same sentence ; as, He came to the house 
 crying. The tree stands firmly rooted in the soil. 
 
104 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Participles may take : 
 
 1. Adverbial modifiers; as, Walking rapidly, he soon 
 completed his journey. Reading without reflection profits us 
 little. The steamer is lying where we saw it yesterday. 
 
 2. Objects ; as, Expecting to see you, I did not write. 
 Having stated that Grant won the battle, he retired. 
 
 3. Complements ; as, Being sleepy, I retired early. John, 
 being a hero, did his duty. 
 
 A participle may be used with a noun or a pronoun in the 
 absolute construction ; as, The signal being given, the class 
 was excused. The weather permitting, we shall go home 
 to-morrow. 
 
 A participle, or a participial phrase, may be used as an 
 adjective ; as, We visited a ruined castle. Running water 
 does not stagnate. The garrison, expecting reinforcements, 
 refused to surrender. 
 
 The participial infinitive and the infinitive with to have, 
 in part, the same uses. Both may be used (1) as the 
 subject of a verb ; as, Seeing is believing. To see is to 
 believe ; (2) as the object of a verb ; as, He likes travelling. 
 He likes to travel; (3) as the complement of a copulative 
 verb ; as, Seeing is believing. To see is to believe. 
 
 NOTE. — "When derived from a transitive verb, 
 the infinitive in ing can govern an object, and is then 
 called a gerund. It is the same in form as the imper- 
 fect participle, but the two are entirely unlike in use ; 
 the participle is a verbal adjective, and the gerund 
 is a verbal noun. 
 
 On account of their twofold nature and manifold uses, 
 verbals are regarded as the most difficult subjects treated 
 in grammar. It must be remembered that an infinitive is 
 
PARTICIPLES. 105 
 
 a verb-noun, a participle, a verb-adjective. These forms 
 are nouns and adjectives derived from verbs. An infinitive 
 expresses in noun-form the act that the verb asserts ; as, 
 He gives ; gives expresses an assertion, but the action itself 
 is expressed by the phrasal infinitive to give or by the parti- 
 cipial infinitive giving. It is clear that to give and giving are 
 the names of actions, hence they are nouns. 
 
 A participle has the signification of a verb, but the con- 
 struction of an adjective ; as, We found him lying on the 
 ground. Lying has the signification of a verb, but is used 
 as an adjective. We will now illustrate the most impor- 
 tant uses of these two derivative words. A careful study 
 of this Exercise should make every construction of infini- 
 tives and participles clear. 
 
 Infinitives. — The infinitive or verb-noun has three forms : 
 1. The form without the sign to ; as, I ivork. 2. The phrasal 
 form with the sign to ; as, To work is a duty. 3. The form 
 in ing ; as, Working is honorable. 
 
 The phrasal infinitive may be used to complete the 
 meaning of nouns, adjectives, verbs, and adverbs. In these 
 uses it may be regarded as a complementary infinitive and 
 parsed or construed as a unit. It is the complement to the 
 word it limits ; as, 1. Mary came to see us. 2. He rejoiced 
 to hear of it. 3. Give me something to eat. 4. Henry has 
 a fine horse to sell. 5. She was glad to see you. 6. He is 
 ready to start. 7. John was not strong enough to lift if. 
 8. He came too late to catch the train. 
 
 The phrasal infinitive, preceded by a noun or a pronoun 
 in the objective case, forms with the noun or the pronoun 
 a substantive phrase. The whole group may be regarded 
 as the object of the verb, or the noun or the pronoun may 
 
106 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 be regarded as the grammatical object and the infinitive as 
 a complementary infinitive ; as, 1. He invited John to come. 
 2. I asked him to go. In 1, John to come is the logical 
 object ; John the grammatical object ; to go the comple- 
 mentary infinitive. In 2, him to go is the logical object ; 
 to go the complementary infinitive. 3. I want him to be 
 good. To be joins the adjective good to him, the word 
 which the adjective limits. 4. I wish him to become a 
 lawyer. To become joins the noun lawyer to the pronoun 
 him, with which it is in apposition. Logically the analysis 
 is complete when we say that I is the subject, wish the 
 verb, and him to become a lawyer the object. 5. He appears 
 to be contented. To be contented is the complement of the 
 copulative verb appears. Contented is used as a predicate 
 adjective, joined to He by appears to be. 6. He desires me 
 to be fashionable. To be joins fashionable to the pronoun 
 me, the word which fashionable limits. Or regard to be as 
 the complementary infinitive limiting me. 7. We are about 
 to close this lesson. The infinitive phrase, to close this les- 
 son, is the object of the preposition about. 8. It is profitable 
 to read good books. The infinitive phrase, to read good 
 books, is the logical subject of the sentence, it being merely 
 the representative subject. 
 
 The infinitive noun in ing may be limited by a noun or 
 a pronoun in the possessive case ; as, I was surprised at 
 John's being absent. I have no faith in his keeping his 
 promise. It may be used wholly as a noun with the pre- 
 ceding and of following it ; as, The reading of the verdict 
 required an hour. 
 
 Participles. — The participle, or verb-adjective, as a verb 
 expresses action, as an adjective it limits a noun or its 
 
PARTICIPLES. 107 
 
 equivalent. A few examples should make these facts clear. 
 1. Seeing the boy fall, I picked him up. Seeing is used as 
 an adjective and as a verb. As an adjective it modifies I; 
 as a verb it takes the object boy. 2. I saw a man walking 
 in the garden. Walking is used as an adjective and as a 
 verb ; as an adjective it limits man ; as a verb it is modi- 
 fied by the adverbial phrase in the garden. 3. I felt my 
 heart beating faster. Beating is the objective complement 
 modifying heart. Faster tells how his heart beats, hence 
 it is an adverb of manner. 
 
 The possessive case should be used with the participle 
 where possession is denoted ; as, " There is no question 
 in regard to Mr. Lowe's having received a majority of 
 the votes." Not, " There is no question in regard to Mr. 
 Lowe having received a majority of the votes." Again, 
 " The man's having been seriously injured prevented him 
 coming to-day." 
 
 The present participle is used in the progressive form of 
 the verb ; as, The farmer is ploughing the field ; the past 
 participle in the perfect form of the verb ; as, The farmer 
 had ploughed the field ; the passive participle in the passive 
 form of the verb ; as, The field was ploughed by the farmer. 
 
 NOTE. — Verbals do not have definite tense sig- 
 nification. They show the act as indefinite, progres- 
 sive, or perfected. They assert action in a general 
 way without limiting the action to any time, or as- 
 serting it of any subject. They express tense as 
 present, past, or future relatively to the time of the 
 principal verb. 
 
 In order to distinguish the present participle from the 
 participial infinitive, the infinitive ending in ing, we must 
 
108 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 remember that the former is used in the sense of an adjec- 
 tive, the latter in the sense of a noun ; as, 1. People, living 
 in cities, often long for the quiet of a country home. 2. He 
 finds no pleasure in living. In sentence 1, living is used as 
 an adjective ; in sentence 2, living is used as a noun. Use, 
 not form, determines the part of speech to which a word 
 belongs in a given sentence. 
 
 Parsing. 
 
 In parsing an infinitive, tell (1) whether it is simple or 
 participial; (2) its principal parts; (3) its coyistruction, 
 whether nominative or objective, with reason. 
 
 MODEL I. — To see the sun is pleasant. To see is a 
 simple, present infinitive, transitive. Principal parts, 
 see, saw, seen, and is used as a noun, subject of the 
 proposition. 
 
 MODEL II. — I like to see the sun. To see is a simple, 
 present infinitive, transitive. Principal parts, see, saw, 
 seen, and is used as a noun, object of the verb like. 
 
 MODEL HI. — He, hoping to be healed of the disease, 
 went to Hot Springs, Arkansas. To be healed is an 
 infinitive phrase, present, passive infinitive of the 
 verb heal. Principal parts, heal, healed, healed. It is 
 used as a noun, object of the participle hoping. 
 
 MODEL IV. — Walking is good exercise. Walking is 
 a participial infinitive, present, active, intransitive. 
 Principal parts, walk, walked, walked. It is used as a 
 noun, subject of the proposition. 
 
 Parse the infinitives in the following sentences : 
 
 1. I prefer to walk. 
 
 2. I do not seem to understand you. 
 
 3. I swore never to reveal the hiding-place. 
 
 4. To be good is to be happy. 
 
PARSING. 109 
 
 5. Pardon my asking if you like to read. 
 
 6. I begin to understand you. 
 
 7. We believed the story to be false. 
 
 8. We suppose it to be him. 
 
 9. And fools, who came to scoff, remained to pray. 
 
 10. It is wiser for us to make the attempt alone. 
 
 11. I knew him to be a fraud. 
 
 12. To love is to live. 
 
 13. I am about to close this recitation. 
 
 14. Why stay we on earth except to grow? 
 
 In parsing a. participle tell (1) whether it is simple or com- 
 pound, present or past, active or passive; (2) the verb from 
 which it is formed, with principal parts of the verb ; (3) the 
 construction. 
 
 MODEL I. — Immured in cypress shades a sorcerer 
 dwells. Immured is a simple, passive participle from 
 the verb immure. Principal parts, immure, immured, im- 
 mured, and, like an adjective, it limits sorcerer. 
 
 MODEL II. — Having lost the game, the players dis- 
 banded. Having lost is a compound participle, perfect 
 or past of the verb lose. Principal parts, lose, lost, lost. 
 It is used as an adjective qualifying the noun players. 
 
 MODEL m. — John, having been called, went to the 
 front. Having been called is a compound participle, 
 passive, from the verb call. Principal parts, call, 
 called, called. It is used as an adjective qualifying the 
 noun John. 
 
 Parse the participles in the following sentences : 
 
 1. Here are letters announcing his return. 
 
 2. The rain came pouring down in torrents. 
 
 3. His having been absent makes it difficult for him to keep up. 
 
 4. Being occupied with very important matters, he had no leisure 
 to see us. 
 
 5. We used to live in the adjoining house, fronting the park. 
 
110 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 6. Our guest, offering assistance, was accepted among the number. 
 
 7. Having been driven from home, he enlisted in the army. 
 
 8. During the storm, we saw an oak shattered by a thunderbolt. 
 
 9. He, stooping down, and looking in, saw the linen clothes 
 lying, yet went he not in. 
 
 10. Being convinced of his guilt, we resolved to punish him. 
 
 11. Having declined the proposal, I went away. 
 
 12. By consulting the best authorities, he became learned. 
 
 13. The souFs dark cottage, battered and decayed, 
 
 Lets in new light through chinks that time has made. 
 
 Test Questions. — Sentence-Making. 
 
 TO THE TEACHER : The sentence-making exer- 
 cises should cover only the most important uses of 
 the grammatical terms. There are some things in 
 grammar that every one must know, in order to ex- 
 press his thoughts concisely and clearly. There are 
 many unimportant things -which should be passed 
 in the grammar grades, for details confuse and dis- 
 courage young pupils. The sentence-making tests 
 compel the pupil to review the text, to study the 
 illustrative examples, and privileges the teacher to 
 keep comparatively quiet during the recitation. 
 
 1. What is meant by the word infinitive in grammar? 
 
 2. Why are infinitives called verbal nouns ? 
 
 3. Into how many classes are infinitives divided ? 
 
 4. What is meant by the phrase root infinitive f 
 
 5. Why may infinitives take modifiers, objects, and 
 complements? 
 
 6. What is meant by the word participle f 
 
 7. How many kinds of participles are there ? 
 
 8. How does the present participle end? 
 
 9. How does the past participle end ? 
 
 10. What is a compound participle ? Illustrate. 
 
TEST-QUESTIONS. HI 
 
 11. State concisely and clearly the distinguishing differ- 
 ence between a finite verb and an infinitive. 
 
 12. State concisely and clearly the distinguishing differ- 
 ence between a participle and a verb. 
 
 13. Use a phrasal infinitive (1) as the subject of a verb ; 
 (2) as the object of a verb ; (3) as the complement of a 
 copulative verb ; (4) as an adjective ; (5) as an adverb. 
 
 14. Use an infinitive in ing (1) as the subject of a verb ; 
 (2) as the object of a verb ; (3) as the complement of a 
 copulative verb. 
 
 15. Show that a phrasal infinitive may be the logical 
 subject of a verb with it as the anticipative subject. 
 
 16. Show that a phrasal infinitive may be in apposition 
 with a noun. 
 
 17. Show that the phrasal infinitive and the infinitive in 
 ing are frequently interchangeable. 
 
 18. Show that the infinitive in ing and the present par- 
 ticiple are alike in form, but unlike in use. 
 
 19. Show that a phrasal infinitive may be the object of 
 a preposition. 
 
 20. In each of three sentences, use a participial phrase 
 as an adjunct of the subject of a verb. 
 
 21. In each of three sentences, use a different form of the 
 noun-term as the object of a participle. 
 
 22. In each of three sentences, use a different form of the 
 adverb-term as a modifier of a participle. 
 
 23. In each of two sentences, use an adjective as the com- 
 plement of a participle and point out its use in the phrase. 
 
 24. In each of two sentences, use a noun as the comple- 
 ment of a participle and point out its use in the phrase. 
 
EXERCISE XV. 
 
 Varied Uses of Words. 
 
 This is a convenient place to review the uses of several 
 puzzling words that have, at different times, the force of two 
 or more different parts of speech. In English a word does 
 not belong exclusively to a single class or part of speech. 
 The part of speech to which a word belongs in a particular 
 sentence depends upon its use in that sentence. That is, 
 the same form of a word may be used as several parts of 
 speech. The master-key that unlocks every profitable sys- 
 tem of teaching grammar is therefore, not because. What 
 part of speech a word is cannot be determined at sight, but 
 only by its connection and dependence. A pupil should 
 be taught first to see what a word does in the sentence, 
 then to infer what part of speech it is. 
 
 In the sentence, " Black is a color," the word black is the 
 subject of the sentence, therefore it is a noun. In the sen- 
 tence, " John is a black boy," the word black limits a noun, 
 therefore it is an adjective. In the sentence, " Black my 
 shoes," the word black expresses action, therefore it is a 
 verb. Almost any part of speech may be used as a verb. 
 Thus, man is a verb in the sentence, " Man the boat. Up, 
 usually a preposition, is a verb in the sentence, " Up with 
 the flag." Black, usually an adjective, is a verb in the sen- 
 tence, " Black your shoes." While, usually an adverb, is a 
 verb in the sentence, " While away the time." 
 
 112 
 
VARIED USES OF WORDS. 113 
 
 The following brief survey of the words most widely 
 used as two or more parts of speech shows that use decides 
 classification : 
 
 All. All may be (1) a noun ; as, He lost all. (2) An 
 adjective ; as, All men are mortal. (3) An adverb ; as, His 
 cheeks were all pale. 
 
 As. As may be (1) a relative pronoun ; as, Such as I 
 have, give I unto thee. (2) A conjunctive adverb of time; 
 as, I arrived as he was taking his leave. (3) A conjunctive 
 adverb of manner ; as, Speak as you think. (4) An adverb 
 of degree ; as, You are as old as I am. (5) A preposition ; 
 as, His place as a thinker is difficult to fix. (6) Part of a 
 phrase ; as, As to that matter, he was silent. 
 
 Both. Both may be (1) an adjective ; as, Both methods 
 are good. (2) A correlative conjunction ; as, He is both 
 virtuous and wise. 
 
 But. But may be (1) a conjunction ; as, He is not sick, 
 but faint. (2) A preposition ; as, They gave all but one. (3) 
 an adverb ; as, If they kill us, we shall but die. (4) A rela- 
 tive pronoun ; as, There is no sailor but is superstitious. 
 This means there is not a sailor who is not superstitious. 
 
 Considering'. Considering may be (1) a participle ; as, 
 Loudon carefully considering the offer decided to accept it. 
 
 (2) A preposition ; as, Considering the difficulties, the jour- 
 ney was quickly made. (3) A gerund ; as, His time w T as 
 occupied with considering the affairs of state. 
 
 No. No may be (1) a limiting adjective ; as, He had no 
 more money. (2) An adverb ; as, He is there no longer. 
 
 (3) An independent adverb ; as, A r o, I will never consent. 
 
 8 
 
114 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Only. Only may be (1) an adjective ; as, The only lesson 
 heard was reading. (2) An adverb ; as, I wrote only to 
 amuse myself. (3) A conjunction ; as, It is the right kind, 
 only it is too small. 
 
 So. So may be (1) an adverb of manner ; as, Do it so. 
 (2) A subordinate conjunction ; as So he can gain his point, 
 he does not care. (3) A substitute for an expression ; as, 
 I am in earnest, but he is more so = in earnest. 
 
 That. That may be (1) a relative pronoun ; as, The man 
 that I met was the teacher. (2) An adjective pronoun ; as, 
 That is what I mean ; (3) An adjective ; as, That book be- 
 longs to me. (4) A substantive conjunction ; as, I knew 
 that he would soon retire. (5) A conjunction of purpose ; 
 as, He died that we might live. 
 
 "What. What may be (1) a relative pronoun ; as, It is 
 what (that which) I wanted. (2) An interrogative pronoun ; 
 as, What (things) do you want? (3) An interrogative 
 adjective ; as, What excuse does she make? (4) An inter- 
 jection ; as, What ! Have you come at last ? 
 
 Which. Which may be (1) a relative pronoun ; as, The 
 horse which I rode. (2) An interrogative pronoun ; as, 
 Which did you take? (3) An interrogative adjective; as, 
 Which horse did you buy ? 
 
 Yet. Yet may be (1) an adverb ; as, The deed was made 
 yet darker by his profession of friendship. (2) A coordi- 
 nate conjunction ; as, " Yet I say unto you that even Solo- 
 mon in all his glory was not arrayed like one of these." 
 
 As — As denotes a comparison of equality ; as, John is 
 as old as William (is old). The first as modifies old, hence 
 
VARIED USES OF WORDS. 115 
 
 it is an adverb. The second as introduces a subordinate 
 clause, hence it is a conjunction. 
 
 So — As denotes a comparison of inequality ; as, John is 
 not so old as William (is old). In this sentence so modifies 
 the adjective old, hence it is an adverb. As introduces a 
 subordinate clause, hence it is a conjunction. 
 
 Phrase Combinations. 
 
 Certain phrases or combinations become idiomatic and 
 practically inseparable. Their meaning and force are lost 
 in trying to separate or analyze them. To study and accept 
 these idiomatic forms is far more useful than to try to adjust 
 every word to its proper class and rule of construction. 
 Even classical scholars and technical grammarians do not 
 always agree upon the classification and construction of 
 peculiar and idiomatic expressions. The difference in 
 opinion in regard to the case of a noun is often of small 
 moment, but it is very important that the use of the word 
 or expression should be clearly understood. The difference 
 between tweedle dum and ticeedle dee is not a vital one. 
 
 The following are the most important combinations : 
 
 1. A noun with a verb; as, The steak eats well. The 
 sentence reads well. In each of the foregoing sentences the 
 verb is used passively. In a similar way we have the pro- 
 gressive form; as, The house is building. Potatoes are 
 selling high. 
 
 2. A double object, a noun and an adjective; as, Lay 
 the head low. Drink the cup dry. Bake the bread brown. 
 Plough the furrow deep. In the foregoing it is clear that 
 the adjective is an attributive object. 
 
116 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 3. An adjective with a verb ; as, He walks lame. He came 
 late. Here the adjectives clearly belong to the subjects, but 
 modify the verbs. 
 
 4. A preposition with a verb ; as, He should act up to the 
 contract. I want to go over with him. If taken alone the 
 preposition is an adverb ; if joined to the verb as part of 
 the verb-term, the term is a unit. 
 
 5. A preposition with a p>reposition, a preposition phrase, 
 not a prepositional phrase ; as, He went over and over the 
 lesson. By and by he will do better. We looked through 
 and through the book. These are inseparable adverbial 
 phrases ; they are units and cannot be analyzed. 
 
 6. A pi^eposition with an adjective ; as, In vain he tried to 
 solve the problem. At first I believed he would win the 
 prize. At least he deserves our thanks. The foregoing 
 are inseparable adverbial phrases. 
 
 7. Two or more prepositions without a conjunction ; as, He 
 came out into the yard. He went up to within a foot of the 
 stove. Regard the first preposition as an adverb. Occa- 
 sionally both prepositions must be regarded as adverbs ; as, 
 The rules must be lived up to. The whole subject was 
 gone over ivith. These adverbs must be regarded as units. 
 There is no law of language that forbids closing a sentence 
 with a preposition. 
 
 8. Two or more conjunctions^ an inseparable conjunction 
 phrase ; as, " Now when these things were first ordained, 
 the priests went always into the first tabernacle." u Nor 
 yet that he should offer himself often." 
 
EXERCISE XVI. 
 
 The Sentence. — Subject. — Predicate. — Principal, 
 Subordinate, and Independent Elements. 
 
 Sentence. 
 
 Every sentence, however long, logically has but two parts, 
 — a subject and a predicate. 
 
 Subject. 
 
 The subject of a sentence is the part about which some- 
 thing is said ; as, 1. The laws of nature are the thoughts of 
 God. 2. Helping others helps ourselves. 3. That the earth 
 is round is admitted. 
 
 Predicate. 
 
 The predicate of a sentence is the part that expresses 
 what is said about the subject; as, 1. The laws of nature 
 are the thoughts of God. 2. Helping others helps ourselves. 
 3. That the earth is round is admitted. 
 
 The bare or grammatical subject of a sentence is the 
 word that denotes the person or the thing about which 
 some assertion is made ; as, The laws of nature are the 
 thoughts of God. 2. The birds of this region will return in 
 the spring. 3. The pupils of this class who are attentive 
 will improve. 
 
 The bare or grammatical predicate is the predicate verb 
 or verb-phrase that expresses what is asserted of the sub- 
 ject ; as, 1. The laws of nature are the thoughts of God. 2. 
 
 117 
 
118 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 The birds of this region ivill return in the spring. 3. He 
 should have gone on the morning train. 
 
 The bare or grammatical subject together with its modi- 
 fiers is called the complete or logical subject ; as, 1. The real 
 difference between men is energy. 2. The oil in the lamp 
 mounts high in the wick. 3. The moaning of the jwisoners 
 who are in the penitentiary was heard at midnight. 
 
 The bare or grammatical predicate together with its com- 
 plement and modifiers is called the complete or logical predi- 
 cate; as, 1. Heaven from all creatures hides the book of fate. 
 2. The young man likes to work. 3. He was a very distin- 
 guished American orator. 
 
 Principal Elements. 
 
 The principal elements of a sentence are the parts that 
 make the unqualified assertion; as, 1. The blue face of 
 ocean smiled. 2. The blind poet to whom he referred was 
 Milton. 3. A small leak may sink the largest ship. 
 
 Subordinate Elements. 
 
 The subordinate elements of a sentence are the modi- 
 fiers of the principal elements ; as, 1. The blue face of ocean 
 smiled. 2. TJie blind poet to whom he referred was Milton. 
 
 Independent Elements. 
 
 The independent elements of a sentence are the words 
 and phrases that are not grammatically related to the sen- 
 tence with which they stand ; as, 1. James, hear me. 2. I 
 think, my dear old friend, you are wrong. 3. You know, 
 come what may, I will not forget you. 4. Religion, who can 
 doubt it, is the noblest of themes. 
 
THE SENTENCE. 119 
 
 1. Classify the following sentences. State kind: (1) with 
 regard to use ; (2) with regard to structure. 
 
 2. Pick out (1) the bare subject ; (2) the bare predicate ; 
 (3) the unqualified assertion ; (4) the complete or logical 
 subject ; (5) the complete or logical predicate. 
 
 3. Pick out (1) the modifiers of the subject ; (2) the 
 modifiers of the predicate. 
 
 4. Pick out the independent elements and tell why they 
 are independent. 
 
 1. The human heart refuses to believe in a universe without a 
 purpose. — Kant. 
 
 2. To neglect the education of the country boys and girls is to in- 
 vite a terrible national danger. — Richard Edwards. 
 
 3. Now the bright morning star, day's harbinger, comes dancing 
 from the east. — Shakespeare. 
 
 4. It is irrational to pass by the moral and religious nature of 
 children in our scheme of education. — Newton Bateman. 
 
 5. When you doubt, abstain. — Zoroaster. 
 
 6. Earth's highest station ends in, " Here he lies." 
 
 7. A friend is a person with whom I may be sincere. — Emerson. 
 
 8. Truth is the property of no individual, but is the treasure of all 
 men . — Emerson. 
 
 9. That you have been deceived is clear. 
 
 10. Things are not what they seem. 
 
 11. The fact that he was beaten could not be denied. 
 
 12. You must study diligently, if you would succeed. 
 
 13. Help me, Cassius, or I will sink. 
 
 14. Be quiet ! there is no danger. 
 
 15. The teacher, smiling slightly, corrected my mistake. 
 
 16. The lioness when hungry will watch noisily for her prey. 
 
 17. After long, heavy rains some rivers become so high that they 
 overflow their banks. 
 
 18. When she passed, it seemed like the ceasing of exquisite music. 
 
120 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 19. The house standing on the hill is rented. 
 
 20. They that are whole need not a physician. 
 
 21. By the way, I saw your friend yesterday. 
 
 22. Thy rod and thy staff, they comfort me. 
 
 23. We were sitting by the window when the clock struck nine. 
 
 24. Where he is buried has never been discovered. 
 
 25. It is a strange thing how little people know about the sky. 
 
 Test Questions — Sentence-Making. 
 
 1. What is meant by the phrase elements of a sentence? 
 
 2. How are the elements of sentences classified ? 
 
 3. What is meant by the phrase principal elements ? 
 
 4. What is meant by the phrase subordinate elements f 
 
 5. What is meant by the phrase independent elements f 
 
 6. What is meant by complete or logical subject f 
 
 7. What is meant by complete or logical predicate f 
 
 8. Compose a sentence whose subject is modified by a 
 word, a phrase, a clause. 
 
 9. Compose a sentence whose predicate is modified by 
 a word, a phrase, a clause. 
 
 10. Compose sentences whose predicates consist (1) of 
 a copulative verb and an adjective ; (2) of a copulative verb 
 and a noun. 
 
 11. Compose sentences whose predicates consist (1) of 
 a copulative verb and a phrase ; (2) of a copulative verb 
 and a clause. 
 
 12. Compose sentences whose predicates consist (1) of 
 a transitive verb and its object (word-form) ; (2) of a tran- 
 sitive verb and its object (phrase-form) ; (3) of a transitive 
 verb and its object (clause-form.) 
 
EXERCISE XVII. 
 
 Twelve Rules of Syntax. 
 
 Syntax is that part of grammar which treats of the con- 
 struction of sentences and the proper arrangement of words 
 in sentences. It treats of the agreement, government, and 
 position of the elements of a sentence. 
 
 Agreement is the similarity of the parts of speech in 
 their properties ; as, a plural noun and a plural verb are 
 said to agree in number ; a masculine pronoun referring to 
 a noun of the masculine gender as its antecedent is said to 
 agree with it in gender. 
 
 Government is the power that some parts of speech are 
 said to have in determining the properties of others ; as, a 
 preposition requires its object to be in the objective case; 
 a transitive verb requires that its object shall be in the 
 objective case ; a plural subject demands a plural verb. 
 
 Position is the place that words properly occupy with 
 respect to other words of the sentence. 
 
 This general agreement, expressed in the form of a state- 
 ment, is called a Rule of Syntax. In English there are 
 comparatively few changes in form to denote agreement. 
 The construction of the sentence depends, not upon word- 
 forms, but upon the laws of order and reason. A few 
 general principles govern the grammatical construction of 
 the words in a sentence. Of these, the following ten are 
 
 the most important : 
 
 121 
 
122 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 TO THE TEACHER : Experience proves that a 
 formal, memory knowledge of the rules ■which gov- 
 ern the use of pure English will not dislodge the use 
 of incorrect constructions and verbose and careless 
 expressions. The use of correct forms becomes a 
 habit only through long and persistent effort of the 
 will. No amount of parsing and analysis will ma- 
 terially change the forms used in expressing origi- 
 nal thought. Revision is the only sure remedy for 
 incorrect and indirect statements. 
 
 Rule I. The verb agrees with its subject in person 
 and number. 
 
 This rule is violated by using a plural verb with every 
 one, each, any one. 
 
 Violation. Every one we knew were going. 
 Correction. Every one we knew was going. 
 
 It is violated by using a plural verb with a subject plural 
 in form but singular in meaning. 
 
 Violation. The news have arrived. 
 Correction. The news has arrived. 
 
 Rule II. The subject of a finite verb is in the 
 nominative case. 
 
 This rule is violated by using the objective case after as 
 or than. 
 
 Violation. You knew this as well as me. 
 Correction. You knew this as well as I (did). 
 
 Rule III. Two or more singular subjects connected 
 by and require a plural verb. 
 
 Violation. Time and tide waits for no man. 
 Correction. Time and tide wait for no man. 
 
TWELVE RULES OF SYNTAX. 123 
 
 Rule IV. Two or more singular subjects connected 
 by or or nor require a singular verb. 
 
 Violation. John or Mary were in the wrong. 
 Correction. John or Mary was in the wrong. 
 
 Violation. Neither he nor she were invited. 
 Correction. Neither he nor she was invited. 
 
 Correct the following sentences : 
 
 1. He or his brother are guilty of the theft. 
 
 2. Neither John nor James walk to school. 
 
 3. The man or his brother sleep in the parlor. 
 
 4. Neither the husband nor his wife call at the office. 
 
 Rule V. A pronoun used as the subject of a verb 
 is in the nominative case. 
 
 Violation. Him and me went to the theatre together. 
 Correction. He and I Avent to the theatre together. 
 
 Correct the following sentences : 
 
 1. He is taller than me. 
 
 2. She is further advanced than him. 
 
 3. She is not one whom I thought would do this. 
 
 4. Why won't father answer as well as me? 
 
 5. You and me will go together. 
 
 6. They that seek wisdom will be wise. 
 
 7. Is James as old as me ? 
 
 8. Whom do you think called upon me this morning ? 
 
 9. My brother is a better swimmer than him. 
 10. Such a man as him could never be President. 
 
 Rule VI. Pronouns agree with their antecedents 
 in person, number, and gender. 
 
 This rule is often violated by using a plural pronoun in 
 referring to each, any one, and every one. 
 
124 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Violation. Every one should attend to their own business. 
 Correction. Every one should attend to his own business. 
 
 Correct the following examples : 
 
 1. Not a boy of the entire class knew their own name. 
 
 2. If any pupil present is in favor of this, let them hold up their 
 right hand. 
 
 3. Every one was looking out for themselves. 
 
 4. Each of the five children had a present to take to their home. 
 
 5. When he shoots a partridge, a woodcock, or a pheasant, he 
 gives them away. 
 
 6. Each was the centre of their own world. 
 
 Rule VII. An adverb modifies a verb, an adjec- 
 tive, or another adverb. 
 
 This rule is often violated by using an adjective in place 
 of an adverb. 
 
 Violation. He recited perfect to-day. 
 Correction. He recited perfectly to-day. 
 
 Violation. Deal gentle with him. 
 Correction. Deal gently with him. 
 
 Examine carefully the following sentences and think the 
 adverbs into their proper places : 
 
 1. All that glitters is not gold. 
 
 2. We cannot deprive any one of merit wholly. 
 
 3. We have been disappointed greatly at your conduct. 
 
 4. We always should prefer duty to pleasure. 
 
 5. The planets are in motion perpetually. 
 
 6. They are nearly dressed alike. 
 
 7. He used to often come ; I wished to really know him. 
 
 The adverb is more frequently misplaced than any other 
 part of speech. The most troublesome adverb is " only." 
 The use of this adverb deserves particular attention. 
 
TWELVE RULES OF SYNTAX. 125 
 
 Violation. I only have five dollars on hand. 
 Correction. I have only five dollars on hand. 
 
 The adverb should be placed before the adjective, the 
 adverb, and the phrase which it modifies. It may be 
 placed before or after the verb; as, 1. I have only three 
 apples left. 2. They were dressed nearly alike. 3. He 
 left early in the morning. 4. He walked slowly to town. 
 
 Rule VIII. The object of a verb, a participle, or a 
 preposition is in the objective case. 
 
 This rule is violated by using the nominative case- form 
 of a pronoun instead of the objective. 
 
 Violation. Who did you see yesterday ? 
 Correction. Whom did you see yesterday ? 
 
 Violation. Who did you intend this for? 
 Correction. Whom did you intend this for ? 
 
 Correct the following sentences : 
 
 1. Who did he marry? 
 
 2. Who should I find but my cousin ? 
 
 3. Will you let him and I sit together ? 
 
 4. They that help us we should reward. 
 
 5. He that made the last speech the audience cheered. 
 
 Rule IX. A predicate pronoun agrees in case with 
 the subject which it qualifies. 
 
 This rule is violated by using the objective case-form of 
 the pronoun instead of the nominative. 
 
 Violation. It is me. 
 Correction. It is I. 
 
 Violation. They were them. 
 Correction. They were they. 
 
126 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Correct the following sentences : 
 
 1. I understood it was her. 
 
 2. Whom do you think I am ? 
 
 3. That it was him no one can doubt. 
 
 4. It may have been her. 
 
 5. It surely must be them. 
 
 6. Probably it will be me that he will call next time. 
 
 7. Here they come ! Yes, those are them. 
 
 8. I think it is them. 
 
 Rule X. Adjectives qualify nouns. 
 
 This rule is frequently violated by using an adverb to 
 qualify a noun. 
 
 Violation. He appears very handsomely in his costume. 
 Correction. He appears very handsome in his costume. 
 
 Rule XI. A noun expressing measure or time is in 
 the objective case with an adverbial value. 
 
 That is, it is an adverbial objective ; as, 1. He waited an 
 hour = for an hour. 2. He died last night = during the 
 night. 3. The pole was five feet long = in length. 
 
 Rule XII. A noun used to explain or identify an- 
 other noun is in the same case by apposition. 
 
 That is, a noun used to describe another noun has the 
 logical value of an adjective clause ; as, Peter, the hermit, 
 lived in a cave. Peter, who was a hermit, lived in a cave. 
 Virginia was named in honor of Elizabeth, the virgin queen. 
 Hermit is in the nominative case ; queen, in the objective. 
 
EXERCISE XVIII. 
 Ten Things to be avoided in Construction. 
 
 In this manual we have space in which to refer to a few 
 of the graver errors which are found in newspaper and 
 magazine articles of to-day. 
 
 I. — Avoid unnecessary repetitions. 
 
 This caution is intended to guard young writers against 
 needless repetition (1) of the same word ; (2) of the same 
 idea. To repeat frequently the same word or the same 
 idea is to confess to the use of a very limited vocabulary 
 and a scarcity of ideas. Repetition, however, is not always 
 censurable. Emphasis may require a repetition of the same 
 word or the same idea. 
 
 II. — Avoid misapplication. 
 
 By misapplication is meant using words either with a 
 wrong meaning or in a wrong connection. 
 
 TO THE TEACHER : Require the pupil to substi- 
 tute the proper word for each word printed in italic 
 in the folio-wing- sentences : 
 
 1. I have bought the balance of the books. 
 
 2. We had ten pear-trees ; neither of them lived. 
 
 3. Which of these ten pencils will you take ? I will not take either 
 of them. 
 
 4. He had less fruit trees than his neighbor. 
 
 5. It did not hurt me any. 
 
 6. If you will not go to me, I shall come to you. 
 
 127 
 
128 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 7. I expect that some of the boys broke the sled. 
 
 8. Let him do like I do. 
 
 9. The teacher learned the pupils arithmetic. 
 10. Do you love strawberries ? 
 
 III. — Omit unnecessary words. 
 
 TO THE PUPIL : The use of unnecessary -words 
 is very common with young- writers. You should 
 carefully review what you write and strike out 
 every word that does not add to the thought. Every 
 unnecessary word weakens the statement. The 
 habit of using superfluous words and incorrect forms 
 of expression can be dislodged only in one way,— by 
 revising your expressions, whether oral or written. 
 Habit yields only to a fixed purpose and a methodi- 
 cal and persistent effort. "What is called genius is 
 often the product of great labor. 
 
 TO THE TEACHER: If most of the time now 
 spent in many schools in reciting the facts of gram- 
 mar were spent in expressing original thought, it 
 would not be long until the average high school 
 graduate could write a correct application for a sit- 
 uation, or express, in ten words, a ten-word mes- 
 sage. He cannot do it now, although he has studied 
 text-book grammar for years. He has declined 
 nouns and pronouns, conjugated verbs, compared 
 adjectives and adverbs, imprisoned sentences in 
 diagrams, but still he cannot correctly describe an 
 event nor state a fact in clean, concise English. No 
 amount of memory cramming, no amount of formal 
 blank-filling, no amount of mere recitation of gram- 
 matical definitions and rules will materially aid 
 pupils in giving clear expression to their own 
 thoughts. Pupils learn to write only in one way,— by 
 writing. Parsing and analysis may serve them in- 
 directly, — the former, by way of fixing what little 
 there is of inflection and form ; the latter, by way of 
 exhibiting the structure of sentences. 
 
TEN THINGS TO BE AVOIDED. 129 
 
 This caution is violated in the following sentences : 
 
 Violation. A second round was fired again. 
 Correction. A second round was fired. 
 
 Violation. Before you write you must think what to say. 
 Correction. Before you write, think what to say. 
 
 Examples for Correction. 
 
 1. He indorsed his name on the back of the check. 
 
 2. Every man on the face of the earth has duties to perform. 
 
 3. He looked for mistakes through the whole essay, but could 
 find none. 
 
 4. The last picture was a very beautiful one. 
 
 5. She very seldom has her grammar lesson. 
 
 6. The last three months have brought an abundant plenty of rain. 
 
 7. When will the balloon ascend up ? 
 
 8. Seaport towns on the Atlantic coast are the great marts for 
 selling Western produce. 
 
 9. Thought and expression act and react upon each other mutually. 
 
 10. The ancient Romans wore a long, loose, untrammelled robe, 
 which they called a toga. 
 
 11. He gave us a glowing description of his descent down into a 
 coal-mine near Pittsburg, Pa. 
 
 12. For the first time he gazed upon the limitless expanse of the 
 boundless prairie. 
 
 13. It is the universal desire of all in the grammar class to have 
 a half-holiday. 
 
 14. Did you ever see that poor, old, widow woman? 
 
 15. By the Portuguese law every person is legally obliged to join 
 the army. 
 
 Improve the following sentences : 
 
 1. Persons who are inclined to be quarrelsome are usually de- 
 spised. 
 
 2. When he heard of the very dangerous position in which we 
 were placed, he hastened at once to our relief. 
 
 9 
 
130 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 3. Have you read ' ' Little Men' ' ? It was written by Louisa Alcott. 
 
 4. George Washington always acted with courage. 
 
 5. A river of great width had to be crossed. 
 
 6. Bring forth the goblet of gold. 
 
 7. To scale the wall was a task of great difficulty. 
 
 8. A man who has courage will not desert his friends. 
 
 9. A fox that does not keep awake catches no poultry. 
 
 10. A man who often loses his temper is an unpleasant companion. 
 
 11. He went to the war against his will. 
 
 12. He described the scene with great eloquence. 
 
 13. He went to the city on purpose to see Admiral Dewey. 
 
 IV. — Avoid improper arrangement. 
 
 Errors in syntax often arise from an improper arrange- 
 ment of the elements of the sentence. The elements of a 
 sentence should be so placed as to render their relation and 
 meaning unmistakable. " As the relation of one word or 
 group of words to another is most frequently determined in 
 English, not by the form of the word but by its position, 
 it follows that a very large part of the syntax of our lan- 
 guage depends upon the order of words. 1 " 
 
 In the natural order of words in a sentence, the subject, 
 preceded by word modifiers and followed by phrase and 
 clause modifiers, is placed first, next the predicate verb, 
 followed by its object or complement and modifiers. A 
 sentence that can be made to mean more than one thing is 
 not good English. 
 
 This caution is violated in the following sentences : 
 
 Violation. The earth appears to be flat on the map. 
 Correction. On the map the earth appears to be flat. 
 
 Violation. I saw a man digging a ditch with a Roman nose. 
 Correction. I saw a man with a Roman nose digging a ditch. 
 
TEN THINGS TO BE AVOIDED. 131 
 
 Violation. I took a book from the library which had never been 
 read. 
 
 Correction. I took from the library a book which had never been 
 read. 
 
 Examples for Correction. 
 
 1. Susan found a diamond ring, assorting rags. 
 
 2. A pearl was found, by a sailor, in a shell. 
 
 3. A boy was killed, with long hair, by a shot from a rifle. 
 
 4. A gentleman called from Germany to pay his respects. 
 
 5. He examined the deed that was handed him with great interest. 
 
 6. Henry saw the procession pass the house, standing in the yard. 
 
 7. The enraged man smothered the child seizing a bolster. 
 
 8. Wanted a man to work on a farm, with no bad habits. 
 
 9. James found a pocket-book crossing the street near the curb- 
 stone. 
 
 10. Some clothes were given to a ragged boy made of woollen goods. 
 
 11. In one evening I saw twenty-seven meteors sitting on my piazza. 
 
 12. Take a tablespoonful before meals undiluted. 
 
 13. People ceased to wonder by degrees. 
 
 14. He apologized when he saw his mistake like a gentleman. 
 
 15. To man has been given the power of speech only. 
 
 16. The bride entered with her father, gowned in dainty white tulle. 
 
 17. He was only able to go as far as Chicago. 
 
 18. He was only successful in accomplishing the result because of 
 hard work. 
 
 V. — Avoid using long, involved, complex sentences. 
 
 Long sentences are a fruitful source of annoyance to the 
 reader and the cause of misunderstandings and law-suits. 
 The profoundest thoughts can be expressed in simple words 
 and in short sentences. For proof of this fact, read Pro- 
 fessor Drummond's sermon on " Love, the Greatest Thing- 
 in the World," Rev. Phillips Brooks's " Symmetry of 
 Life," and the Sermon on the Mount. 
 
132 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 VI. — Avoid using a verb in the wrong number. 
 
 Do not use a verb in the plural when a plural adjunct of 
 the subject comes between a singular subject and its verb. 
 This caution is violated in the following sentence : 
 
 Violation. A succession of accidents have discouraged him. 
 Correction. A succession of accidents has discouraged him. 
 
 Examples for Correction. 
 
 1. The energy of all oppose her. 
 
 2. Each of the officers were suspected. 
 
 3. Nothing except disappointed hopes remain to them. 
 
 4. The greater part of the members were opposed to him. 
 
 5. Caesar with his veterans have conquered Gaul. 
 
 6. The encouragement of education and charity were the chief 
 objects of his life. 
 
 7. Though they seemed to listen with great attention, not one of 
 them were convinced. 
 
 8. Neither of the parties are much better. 
 
 9. The derivation of these words are uncertain. 
 
 10. To these belong the power of licensing places for the sale of 
 intoxicating drinks. 
 
 VII. — Avoid improper ellipsis. 
 
 An ellipsis is the omission of a word, phrase, or clause 
 that is necessary to complete the construction. Depend- 
 ent clauses are often abbreviated into single words or 
 phrases. In analysis and parsing, supply the ellipsis. 
 
 This caution is violated in the following sentence : 
 
 Violation. It is important if true. 
 Correction. It is important if it is true. 
 
TEN THINGS TO BE AVOIDED. 133 
 
 Supply the ellipsis in each of the following sentences : 
 
 1. She is as handsome as ever. 
 
 2. Love thy neighbor as thyself. 
 
 3. I was surprised at the manner he received it. 
 
 4. Solon was banished his country. 
 
 5. Your friends never blame you for making short credits and calls. 
 
 6. It is a long road has no turning. 
 
 7. The children thought one way ; their parents, another. 
 
 8. A topical memory makes a man an almanac ; a talent for debate, 
 a disputant. 
 
 NOTE. — The words omitted as truly belong to 
 the sentence grammatically as the words expressed. 
 
 Examples for Correction. 
 
 1. She placed me near the desk and James at the farther end of the 
 large room. 
 
 2. He never has succeeded and never will. 
 
 3. It is not so easy to get money as to spend it. 
 
 4. It is an offence that does not admit an apology. 
 
 5. I cannot remember one of his statements. 
 
 6. He is still in the situation you saw him. 
 
 7. I would very much rather live with an honest boor than a false 
 gentleman. 
 
 VIII. — Avoid solecisms. 
 
 A solecism is a violation of grammatical rules, or of ap- 
 proved idiomatic usage, any impropriety, a monstrosity. 
 
 The writing habit of the average business man and the 
 talking habit of the average society woman are in a large 
 measure determined by the language used in the daily 
 papers and monthly magazines which they read. In a 
 popular monthly can be found inaugurate for begin, start, 
 or set on foot ; splendid for excellent ; witness for see ; stand- 
 
134 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 point for point of view ; youths for boys and girls ; conflagra- 
 tion for fire ; elegant for delicious (elegant steak) ; epistolary 
 correspondence for letter-writing. 
 
 IX. — Avoid slang;. 
 
 Slang is inelegant, unauthorized language, consisting of 
 words and expressions of low, illiterate origin and use. 
 
 Unfortunately slang is much used in newspaper locals and 
 dime novels. It is the dominant language of cheap saloons 
 and vaudeville theatres. Samples : Go it, boys. Come off. 
 Cut it. Keep your eye peeled. He is a hummer. He is a 
 dandy. He is not in it. She is a stunner. 
 
 X.— Avoid the unnecessary repetition of and. 
 
 That is, do not use and to connect irrelevant sentences. 
 This caution is violated in the following paragraphs : 
 
 "The tiger is not a bold hunter and he does not chase his prey, 
 and he hides in the grass by the roadside and in ditches near drinking- 
 places, and, like the cat, he waits until the victim is near enough and 
 then pounces suddenly upon it, and cattle soon learn when a tiger is 
 about, and they stay in the open meadows, for they can scent him a 
 long way off, and they keep well away from the tall reeds and 
 thickets. 1 ' 
 
 "There is a kind of spider that is called the mason spider, and it 
 builds a house and fixes to it a door, and the door opens and shuts on 
 a hinge like the lid of a box, and this spider digs a hole in the ground 
 about the size of a man's finger, and lines it with silk of its own 
 weaving and keeps it warm and dry, and it makes a trap door of wet 
 earth mixed with a little silk, and the hinges on which this door opens 
 and shuts are made of fine silk ; and then there is another kind of 
 spider, called the geometrical spider, and it weaves its web with lines 
 running out like the spokes of a wheel from a centre, and it crosses 
 these with regular lines." 
 
EXERCISE XIX. 
 
 Transformation of Sentences. 
 
 TO TEACHER AND PUPIL: Composing is the 
 most important agency in developing power to 
 think and in acquiring mastery of the art of expres- 
 sion. Next in value to composing is the transfor- 
 mation of the thoughts of others into equivalent 
 expressions of our own. 
 
 A parrot-like knowledge of inflection and rules has ceased to be the 
 goal of linguists in scholarship, and so far as any useful end is con- 
 cerned, the mere ability to parse and analyze an intricate sentence 
 counts but little. — Professor Huffcut, Cornell University. 
 
 A sentence is transformed when it undergoes a change 
 in the form of any of its elements without material change 
 in the meaning. 
 
 The form of a sentence may be changed : 
 
 I. By the expansion : 
 
 1. Of words into phrases. 
 
 2. Of words into clauses. 
 
 3. Of phrases into clauses. 
 
 4. Of phrases into independent propositions. 
 
 5. Of clauses into independent propositions. 
 
 II. By the contraction : 
 
 1. Of independent propositions into clauses. 
 
 2. Of independent propositions into phrases. 
 
 3. Of clauses into phrases. 
 
 4. Of clauses into words. 
 
 5. Of phrases into words. 
 
 135 
 
136 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Expansion. 
 
 Simple sentences are made complex : 
 
 I. By expanding words into clauses ; as, 
 
 Every great and original action has a prospective greatness. Every 
 action ivhich is great and original has a prospective greatness. 
 
 II. By expanding phrases into clauses ; as, 
 
 1. A library of well-chosen books is a mine of useful knowledge. A li- 
 brary that is composed of well-chosen boohs is a mine of useful knowledge. 
 
 2. Witnesses, proving his innocence, will be produced. Witnesses 
 who will prove his innocence will be produced. 
 
 3. Cortes came to Mexico to find gold. Cortes came to Mexico that 
 he might find gold. 
 
 4. Napoleon being exiled, his adherents lost hope. When Napoleon 
 was exiled his adherents lost hope. 
 
 5. They desired him to occupy the chair. They desired that he should 
 occupy the chair. 
 
 Simple sentences are made compound by expanding 
 phrases into independent propositions ; as, 
 
 The oarsmen, being fatigued with their difficult journey, lost the race. 
 The oarsmen were fatigued with their difficult journey, therefore they 
 lost the race. 
 
 Complex sentences are made compound by expanding 
 clauses into independent propositions ; as, 
 
 When gold was discovered the population of California very rapidly 
 increased. Gold was discovered, and the population of California 
 rapidly increased. 
 
 Contraction. 
 
 Compound sentences are made complex by contracting 
 independent propositions into clauses ; as, 
 
 He spoke, and it was done. When he spoke, it was done. 
 
TRANSFORMATION OF SENTENCES. 137 
 
 Compound sentences are made simple by contracting in- 
 dependent propositions into phrases ; as, 
 
 The people were industrious, therefore they became prosperous. 
 Being industriotis, the people became prosperous. 
 
 Complex sentences are made simple : 
 
 I. By contracting clauses into phrases ; as, 
 
 1. If he perseveres, he will undoubtedly succeed. By persevering, he 
 will undoubtedly succeed. 
 
 2. The seed which was sown on wet soil did not grow. The seed, 
 having been sown on wet soil, did not grow. 
 
 3. The artist hoped that he would gain the prize. The artist hoped 
 to gain the prize. 
 
 4. Since his party is defeated, he will not be appointed. His party 
 being defeated, he will not be appointed. 
 
 5. I believe that he is a self-reliant man. I believe him to be a self- 
 reliant man. 
 
 II. By contracting clauses into words ; as, 
 
 Pottery that is made in Limoges commands a high price. Limoges 
 pottery commands a high price. 
 
 Sentences are also contracted by ellipsis ; as, 
 
 1. Huxley was a great scientist. Darwin was a great scientist. 
 Huxley and Darwin were great scientists. 
 
 2. Peat is a kind of fuel. It is found in Ireland. It is prepared 
 for use by drying in the sun. Peat, a kind of fuel found in Ireland, 
 is prepared for use by drying in the sun. 
 
 3. He spoke as he would speak if he were inspired. He spoke as if 
 inspired. 
 
 I. Expand the following simple sentences into equivalent 
 complex sentences : 
 
138 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 1. Blessed are the peacemakers. 
 
 2. We saw them approaching the village. 
 
 3. We rise by things under our feet. 
 
 4. Finding his army surrounded, the general surrendered. 
 
 5. We honor the brave. 
 
 6. Darkest clouds have often a silver lining. 
 
 7. The shadow of the earth in every position is round. 
 
 8. The conspirators demanded the assassination of Csesar. 
 
 9. The island, being a coaling station, Avas made the first point of 
 attack. 
 
 10. Men living in tropical countries soon lose their energy. 
 
 11. He did not wish me to read the book. 
 
 12. The Constitution being adopted, the assembly adjourned. 
 
 13. Proceeding up the canon, we found many beautiful ferns. 
 
 14. Antony spoke to arouse the populace. 
 
 15. Music hath charms to soothe the savage breast. 
 
 16. The river, winding like a silver thread around the mountains, 
 could be seen far below. 
 
 17. The trumpet having sounded, the battle began. 
 
 18. The majestic rock jutting out into the river was once an Indian 
 stronghold. 
 
 19. He wasted his time over unimportant matters. 
 
 20. We sat until sunset watching the changing light on the still 
 waters. 
 
 II. Expand the following simple or complex sentences 
 into equivalent compound sentences : 
 
 1. When Alexander conquered the known world, he sighed for 
 more worlds to conquer. 
 
 2. The French possessions east of the Mississippi, excepting a 
 small district around New Orleans, were ceded to England. 
 
 3. The Indians proving hostile, the settlers returned to their start- 
 ing-point. 
 
 4. The Alamo, which was so long besieged by the Mexicans, still 
 stands in the city of San Antonio. 
 
TRANSFORMATION OF SENTENCES. 139 
 
 5. The pound of flesh which I demand of him is dearly bought. 
 
 6. Sand-bars having obstructed the mouth of the river, jetties were 
 built to remove them. 
 
 7. Homer, the greatest poet of antiquity, is said to have been 
 blind. 
 
 8. The Phoenicians, who were daring navigators, made many voy- 
 ages to Britain. 
 
 9. The public roads, beginning at the Forum, extended in every 
 direction throughout the empire. 
 
 10. Their identity being unknown, they were buried in one grave 
 at Arlington. 
 
 11. Knowing the independent spirit of the colonists, he feared to 
 restrict their liberties. 
 
 12. Adverse criticism, which often disturbs our self-complacency, 
 awakes us to higher ideals. 
 
 13. The opening of new factories brought increased prosperity to 
 the city. 
 
 14. Wandering from place to place, she vainly sought for the long- 
 lost Gabriel. 
 
 15. The influence of a good man, silently making itself felt, is worth 
 many homilies. 
 
 III. Contract the following compound sentences into 
 equivalent complex or simple sentences : 
 
 1. Do your work, and you shall reinforce yourself. 
 
 2. Slaves are human beings ; therefore they are entitled to their 
 liberty. 
 
 3. Live as though life were earnest, and life will be so. 
 
 4. Trust men, and they will be true to you. 
 
 5. Italy bought the Bonaparte papers, and they were deposited in 
 the Royal Library at Florence. 
 
 6. Resolve to see the world on the sunny side, and you have al- 
 most won the battle of life at the outset. 
 
 7. " Falstaff" is one of Verdi's greatest operas, yet it was written 
 in his old age. 
 
 8. The rain beat upon him, yet he continued his work. 
 
140 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 9. The trouble cannot be cured, therefore it must be endured. 
 
 10. The waters rose rapidly, and before morning dawned the village 
 had been swept away. 
 
 11. He published an account of the voyage, and thus gained great 
 renown. 
 
 12. Nature is an inexhaustible storehouse, and man need not fear 
 for his future sustenance. 
 
 13. He was a man of uncommon ability, yet he refused to devote 
 his talents to the progress of the nation. 
 
 14. The city was under martial law, and the two men narrowly 
 escaped arrest. 
 
 IV. Contract the following complex sentences into equiva- 
 lent simple sentences : 
 
 1. The patriots fought that they might gain freedom. 
 
 2. Had he been ambitious, he would have become great in his 
 profession. 
 
 3. When the nation became contented, it ceased to show intellec- 
 tual or material progress. 
 
 4. Books should not be judged by the passages which are brilliant. 
 
 5. The waters of the Gulf Stream become colder as they flow north- 
 ward. 
 
 6. Thoreau chose the silent woods tbat he might commune with 
 nature. 
 
 7. The body, which was mourned by a nation, was that of the 
 Emperor. 
 
 8. Since the medal was conferred for valor, it was doubly prized 
 by the soldiers. 
 
 9. Johnson declared that wit consisted in finding out resemblances. 
 
 10. When the Confederates were defeated, their money became 
 absolutely worthless. 
 
 11. Since the navy of England was powerful, few nations engaged 
 her in battle on the sea. 
 
 12. It is just that he shall do no more than his share. 
 
 13. When a man has not a good reason for doing a thing, he has 
 one good reason for letting it alone. 
 
TRANSFORMATION OF SENTENCES. 141 
 
 14. Every law, which the State enacts, indicates a fact in human 
 nature. 
 
 15. They believed that he was worthy of the highest honor. 
 
 16. I dare do all that may become a man. 
 
 17. Rejoice not when thine enemy falleth. 
 
 18. If we ascend the table-land of Mexico, we find the climate cool 
 and invigorating. 
 
 19. The oxygen, nitrogen, and carbonic acid which unite to form 
 the atmosphere, are mingled in unequal proportions. 
 
 20. Bismarck, who is often called the "Iron Chancellor," saw his 
 dream of an empire realized. 
 
 21. The work that has been done by Edison has greatly advanced 
 the science of electricity. 
 
 22. Who friendship with a knave has made, 
 Is judged a partner in the trade. — Gay. 
 
 23. When vice prevails and impious men bear sway, 
 The post of honor is a private station. — Addison. 
 
 24. It is no excuse for a fault that you have committed it for the 
 sake of a friend. — Cicero. 
 
 25. Arms are of little value abroad unless there is wisdom at home. 
 
 26. After he had discovered Hispaniola, Columbus returned to 
 Spain. 
 
 27. When the shower had passed away, we resumed our journey. 
 
 28. When peace of mind is secured, we may smile at misfortune. 
 
 29. To an American who visits Europe, the long voyage is an excel- 
 lent preparative. 
 
 30. A man who is deceitful can never be trusted. 
 
EXERCISE XX. 
 Capitals. 
 
 TO THE TEACHER: Experience proves that 
 clear ideas of the fundamental principles of a sub- 
 ject carry with them the observance of minor prin- 
 ples, and that details embarrass and discourage 
 beginners. Mastery of the detail of a subject is im- 
 possible during school and college life. Only the 
 principal uses of capital letters and punctuation 
 marks are given and illustrated in this exercise. 
 The following rules are clearly within the grasp of 
 pupils in high schools. 
 
 Capitals. 
 
 The following words should begin with capital letters : 
 
 1, The titles of books, and the heads of their parts, 
 chapters, sections, and divisions ; as, A History of the 
 Rebellion. Milton's Select Poems. Classes of Nouns. 
 Free Trade and Protection. Watts on the Mind. 
 
 2. The first word of every sentence, of every line of 
 poetry, of every paragraph or line indented from the 
 margin, of every sentence quoted directly ; as, " Evil com- 
 munications corrupt good manners.' 
 
 ?? 
 
 They are slaves who fear to speak 
 For the fallen and the weak ; 
 They are slaves who will not choose 
 Hatred, scoffing, and abuse, 
 Rather than in silence shrink 
 From the truth they needs must think ; 
 They are slaves who dare not be 
 In the right with two or three. — Lowell. 
 142 
 
CAPITALS. 143 
 
 Reading furnishes the mind only with materials of knowledge ; it 
 is thinking that makes what we read ours. — Locke. 
 
 "A man's first care should be to avoid the reproaches of his own 
 heart ; his next to escape the censures of the world. If the last 
 interferes with the former, it ought to be entirely neglected.' 1 
 
 3. Proper names and adjectives derived from proper 
 names should begin with a capital ; as, America, American. 
 Boston, Bostonian. 
 
 4. Titles of honor, office, respect, and distinction should 
 begin with a capital ; as, Chief Justice Fuller, Rev. J. H. 
 Nichols, President Roosevelt. 
 
 5. Names applied to Deity, names of religious sects, of 
 political parties, of days of the week, of months, and of 
 holidays ; as, Our Father. The Republican Party. Epis- 
 copalians. Monday. December. Christmas. 
 
 6. The words I and should be capitals. 
 
 Italics are used to direct attention to an emphatic word, 
 phrase, or clause. 
 
 Sentences to be corrected. 
 
 TO THE TEACHER : Require the pupil to read 
 the sentence as it is, condemn what is to be cor- 
 rected, correct the erroneous part, give the reason 
 by stating the principle violated, and finally read 
 the corrected sentence. With the exception of six 
 or eight well-established rules governing the use of 
 capital letters, the writer is privileged to use his own 
 judgment. Oast-iron rules cannot be applied to an 
 art or science which is still in the process of de- 
 velopment. 
 
 1. Congress authorized general Washington to take charge of the 
 southern district. 
 
 2. The blood of those who have Fallen at concord, lexington, 
 bunker hill cries aloud, " it is time to part. 1 ' 
 
144 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 3. Three cheers were given for the " champion of the south." 
 
 4. The bible says, "children, obey your parents.'" 
 
 5. A hundred presbyterian ministers preached every Sunday in 
 Middlesex. 
 
 6. There was no church to-day at middle grove. 
 
 7. In Benton's thirty years in congress, you can find this state- 
 ment. 
 
 8. Daniel Webster, secretary of state. 
 
 9. At fort black hawk. 
 
 10. He knew general la Fayette and captain Phipps. 
 
 11. He was first a Captain then a General. 
 
 12. This Chief had the sounding appellation of white thunder. 
 
 13. Washington city, the Capital of the United States, is in the 
 district of Columbia. 
 
 14. He is president of Westminster college, and was formerly 
 principal of Montrose academy. 
 
 15. The president lives in the white house. 
 
 16. These Birds go South in the Winter, but return in Spring or 
 Summer. 
 
 17. Falsehood let the arms of sophistry fall from her grasp, and 
 holding up the shield of impudence with both her hands, sheltered 
 herself among the passions. 
 
 18. The first melting of Lead Ore in this country was in a rude 
 log furnace. 
 
 19. This is especially true of Elm and Hickory land. 
 
 20. At length the comprehension bill was sent down to the 
 commons. 
 
 21. The author of the Task was a good Poet. 
 
 22. She has gone to him that comforteth as a father comforteth. 
 
 23. He was President of the massachusetts historical society, and 
 contributor to the Boston daily advertiser. 
 
 24. There dwelt a sage called discipline. 
 
 25. Welsh emigrants who were zealous christians came also. 
 
 26. Some Bottom Prairies of the Missouri are sixty miles long. 
 
EXERCISE XXI. 
 
 Analysis. — Punctuation.— The Paragraph. 
 
 Analysis in grammar is the process of separating a sen- 
 tence into its elements. 
 
 Directions for the Analysis of Sentences. 
 
 1. Read the sentence and state its kind. 
 
 2. If any of the elements are inverted, arrange them in 
 their natural order. 
 
 3. If necessary, supply the ellipsis. 
 
 4. If an element is complex or compound, resolve it into 
 its simple elements. 
 
 The elements of a sentence are the words, phrases, and 
 clauses that perform distinct offices in the sentence. 
 
 A simple element consists of a single word, phrase, or 
 clause, unmodified; as, A wealthy man; a man of wealth; 
 a man who is wealthy. 
 
 A complex element consists of a single word, phrase, or 
 clause, and a modifying element ; as, A very wealthy man ; 
 a man of immense wealth ; a man who is immensely wealthy. 
 
 A compound element consists of two or more simple or 
 
 complex elements joined by a coordinate conjunction ; as, 
 
 Wise and good ; of wisdom and of goodness; with great 
 
 power and with great ability ; that the earth is round and 
 
 that it revolves. 
 
 10 145 
 
146 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 TO THE TEACHER: Require the pupil to ex- 
 press, in his own language, the meaning- of the sen- 
 tence before you permit him to attempt its formal 
 analysis. Analysis is but a means to an end. 
 
 In the proximate analysis of complex sentences, 
 clauses should be regarded as nouns, adjectives, and ad- 
 verbs. Make it clear that a clause is a dependent 
 sentence, — that standing alone it does not make com- 
 plete sense. Show that a clause does the work of a 
 single part of speech, — that is, that the mind regards 
 it as a unit. 
 
 In the ultimate analysis of the elements of a 
 complex sentence, the clauses should be resolved 
 into their component parts, and analyzed as de- 
 pendent sentences. 
 
 The following eight models for the analysis of sentences are 
 taken from the author's " Lessons in Grammar :" 
 
 The readiest pupils of this class study diligently at home. 
 
 MODEL.— I. It is a simple sentence because it 
 contains but one proposition; declarative because 
 it makes a statement. The bare subject is pupils, the 
 complete subject is The readiest pupils of this class ; the 
 bare predicate is study, the complete predicate is study 
 diligently at home. The bare subject is modified by The 
 readiest, and of this class, adjective terms. The bare 
 predicate is modified by diligently, and at home, adverb- 
 terms. 
 
 The gentleman from Boston who called yesterday morning left for 
 home in the afternoon. 
 
 MODEL. — II. It is a complex, declarative sen- 
 tence because it is composed of an independent 
 proposition, a dependent proposition, and states a 
 fact. The independent proposition is The gentleman 
 from Boston left for home in the afternoon. The dependent 
 proposition is who called yesterday morning. 
 
ANALYSIS. 147 
 
 The bare subject of the principal proposition is 
 gentleman, the complete subject is The gentleman from 
 Boston who called yesterday morning ; the bare predicate is 
 left, the complete predicate is left for home in the afternoon. 
 
 The bare subject of the principal proposition is 
 modified by The, from Boston, and who called yesterday morn- 
 ing, adjective-terms. The bare predicate is modified 
 by for home and in the afternoon, adverb-terms. 
 
 Analysis of the Adjective Clause. 
 
 Who is the subject and connective ; called is the 
 bare predicate, called yesterday in the morning is the com- 
 plete predicate. 
 
 If a man empties his purse into his head, no man can take it away 
 from him. 
 
 MODEL. — m. It is a complex, declarative sen- 
 tence, because it is composed of an independent 
 proposition, a dependent proposition, and states a 
 fact. The independent proposition is no man can take 
 it away from him. The dependent proposition is If a man 
 empties his purse into his head. 
 
 The bare subject of the principal proposition is 
 man, the complete subject is no man; the bare predi- 
 cate is can take, the complete predicate is can take it 
 away from him. The bare subject of the principal prop- 
 osition is modified by no, an adjective-term. The 
 bare predicate is modified by its object it, away from 
 him, and If a man empties his purse into his head. 
 
 Analysis of the Adverbial Clause. 
 
 MODEL. — IV. Man is the bare subject, a man the 
 complete subject ; empties is the bare predicate, empties 
 his purse into his head the complete predicate. If is the 
 connective, and joins the adverbial clause to the 
 predicate of the principal proposition. 
 
148 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 A little girl, finding a wild violet, exclaimed, "How glad I am to 
 see you !" 
 
 MODEL. — V. It is a complex, declarative sen- 
 tence. The principal proposition is the entire sen- 
 tence. The bare subject is girl, the complete subject 
 is A little girl, finding a wild violet ; the bare predicate is 
 exclaimed, the complete predicate is exclaimed, "How 
 glad I am to see youV 
 
 Analysis of the Substantive Clause. 
 
 MODEL. — VI. It is a simple, exclamatory sen- 
 tence. I is both the bare and complete subject ; am 
 is the bare predicate, am glad to see you the complete 
 predicate. How is an intensive adverb used to em- 
 phasize the entire sentence. 
 
 A fool speaks all his mind, but a wise man reserves something for 
 
 hereafter. 
 
 MODEL. — VII. It is a compound, declarative sen- 
 tence, because it is composed of two coordinate sen- 
 tences, joined by the conjunction but. 
 
 Analysis of the First Member. 
 
 It is a simple, declarative sentence. The bare 
 subject is fool, the complete subject is A fool; the 
 bare predicate is speaks, the complete predicate is 
 speaks all his mind. The bare subject is modified by A, 
 an adjective-term. The bare predicate is modified 
 by its object mind, which is modified by all and his, 
 adjective terms. 
 
 Analysis of the Second Member. 
 
 It is a simple, declarative sentence, connective 
 but. The bare subject is man, the complete subject is 
 a wise man ; the bare predicate is reserves, the complete 
 predicate is reserves something for hereafter. The bare sub- 
 ject is modified by a and wise, adjective-terms. The 
 bare predicate is modified by its object, something, and 
 the phrase for hereafter, an adverb-term. 
 
ANALYSIS. 149 
 
 He who receives a good turn should never forget it ; he who does 
 one should never remember it. 
 
 MODEL.— Vm. It is a compound-complex sen- 
 tence; compound because it is composed of two 
 coordinate sentences ; complex because each mem- 
 ber is composed of an independent and a dependent 
 proposition. 
 
 Analysis of the First Member. 
 
 It is a complex sentence. The independent prop- 
 osition is He should never forget it, the dependent prop- 
 osition is who receives a good turn. 
 
 Analysis of the Second Member. 
 
 It is a complex sentence. The independent prop- 
 osition is He should never remember it, the dependent 
 proposition is who does one. 
 
 Analyze the following sentences : 
 
 1. Habit is the deepest law of human nature. — Carlyle. 
 
 2. He that lacks time to mourn lacks time to mend. 
 
 3. He spent hours of enjoyment in tramping through the fields. 
 
 4. The sun was up, but it was hidden by the clouds. 
 
 5. Our friends returned sooner than we expected them. 
 
 6. It is doubtful whether the boys understood what I meant. 
 
 7. Columbus died in ignorance of the real grandeur of his dis- 
 covery. 
 
 8. Thou shalt not take the name of the Lord thy God in vain. 
 
 9. Some are born great, some achieve greatness, and some have 
 greatness thrust upon them. 
 
 10. Childhood shows the man as morning shows the day. 
 
 11. Now fades the glimmering landscape on the sight, 
 
 And all the air a solemn stillness holds. 
 
 12. Nothing is denied to well-directed labor ; nothing is ever to be 
 attained without it. 
 
150 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 13. He who would search for pearls must dive below. 
 
 14. The moon has sunk behind the Mount of Olives, and the stars 
 in the darker sky shine doubly bright over the sacred city. 
 
 15. The story which I wrote was published in Wide Awake. 
 
 16. The tongue is the key-board of the soul ; but it makes a world 
 of difference who sits to play upon it. 
 
 17. He who has a thousand friends hath not a friend to spare, 
 And he who has one enemy shall meet him everywhere. 
 
 18. The wages of sin is death ; but the gift of God is eternal life. 
 
 19. The way was long, the wind was cold. 
 The minstrel was infirm and old. 
 
 20. Know ye the land where the cypress and myrtle 
 
 Are emblems of deeds that are done in their clime ? — Byron. 
 
 21. Reading furnishes the mind only with materials of knowledge ; 
 it is thinking that makes what we read ours. — Locke. 
 
 22. You cannot dream yourself into a character ; you must ham- 
 mer and forge yourself one. — Froude. 
 
 23. The night has a thousand eyes and the day but one, 
 
 Yet the light of the bright world dies with the dying sun ; 
 The mind has a thousand eyes and the heart but one, 
 Yet the light of a whole life dies when love is done. 
 
 24. Duty and to-day are ours ; results and futurity belong to God. 
 
 25. Faith that asks no questions kills the soul and stifles the 
 intellect. 
 
 26. We know not whither the hunter went, 
 Or how the last of his days was spent ; 
 
 For the moon drew nigh — but he came not back 
 Weary and faint from his forest track. — Whittier. 
 
 27. I hate anything that occupies more space than it is worth. I 
 hate to see a load of bandboxes going along the street, and I hate to 
 see a parcel of big words without anything in them. — Hazlitt. 
 
 28. The flowers fade, the heart withers, man grows old and dies, 
 the world lies down in the sepulchre of ages ; but Time writes no 
 wrinkles on the brow of Eternity. — Bishop Heber. 
 
 29. Our grand business is not to see what lies dimly at a distance ; 
 but to do what lies clearly at hand. — Carlyle. 
 
ANALYSIS. 151 
 
 30. The one prudence in life is concentration ; the one evil is dis- 
 sipation. — Emerson. 
 
 31. Every blade of grass in the field is measured ; the green cups 
 and the colored crowns of every flower are curiously counted ; the 
 stars of the firmament wheel in calculated orbits ; even the storms 
 have their laws. — Blaikie. 
 
 32. This above all : to thine own self be true, 
 And it must follow, as the night the day, 
 
 Thou canst not then be false to any man. — Shakespeare. 
 
 33. A little weeping would ease my heart ; 
 
 But in their briny bed 
 My tears must stop, for every drop 
 Hinders needle and thread. 
 
 34. He who is taught to live upon little, owes more to his father's 
 wisdom than he that has a great deal left him does to his father's 
 care. — William Penn. 
 
 35. If you have built castles in the air, your work need not be 
 lost ; that is where they should be built ; now put foundations under 
 them . — Thoreau. 
 
 36. The book which makes a man think the most, is the book 
 which strikes the deepest root in his memory and understanding. 
 
 37. What I must do is all that concerns me, not what people 
 think. — Emerson. 
 
 38. Most men know what they hate ; few, what they love. 
 
 39. He who openly tells his friends all that he thinks of them 
 must expect that they will secretly tell his enemies much that they 
 do not think of him. 
 
 40. That nations sympathize with their monarch's glory, that they 
 are improved by his virtues, and that the tone of morals rises high 
 when he that leads the band is perfect, are truths admitted with 
 exultation and felt with honest pride. 
 
 41. Hightly elated by his unexpected good fortune, he returned 
 home. Saving carefully the fruits of his labor, he at length was able 
 to purchase a farm. 
 
 42. A cheerful temper, joined with innocence, will make beauty 
 attractive, knowledge delightful, and wit good-natured. It will 
 
152 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 lighten sickness, poverty, and affliction, convert ignorance into an 
 amiable simplicity, and render deformity itself agreeable. — Addison. 
 
 43. When the victory shall be complete, when there shall be 
 neither a slave nor a drunkard on the earth, — how proud the title of 
 that land which may truly claim to be the birthplace and the cradle 
 of both those revolutions that shall have ended in that victory ! 
 How nobly distinguished that people who shall have planted and 
 nurtured to maturity both the political and moral freedom of their 
 species ! — Abraham Lincoln. 
 
 44. The Bible is the treasure of the poor, the solace of the sick, 
 and the support of the dying ; and while other books may amuse and 
 instruct in a leisure hour, it is the peculiar triumph of that book to 
 create light in the midst of darkness, to alleviate the sorrow which 
 admits of no other alleviation, to direct a beam of hope to the heart 
 which no other topic of consolation can reach ; while guilt, despair, 
 and death vanish at the touch of its holy inspiration. 
 
 45. Will you believe that the pure system of Christian faith which 
 appeared eighteen hundred years ago, in one of the obscurest regions 
 of the Roman empire, at the moment of the highest mental cultiva- 
 tion and of the lowest moral degeneracy ; which superseded at once 
 all the curious fabrics of pagan philosophy ; which spread almost 
 instantaneously through the civilized world, in opposition to the 
 prejudices, the pride, and the persecution of the times ; which has 
 already had the most beneficial influence on society, and has been 
 the source of almost all the melioration of the human character ; and 
 which is now the chief support of the harmony, the domestic happi- 
 ness, the moral and intellectual improvement of the best part of the 
 world : will you believe, I say, that this system originated in the 
 unaided reflections of twelve Jewish fishermen of the Sea of Galilee, 
 with the son of a carpenter at their head ? 
 
 46. To-day is your day and mine ; the only day we have ; the day 
 in which we play our part. What our part may signify in the great 
 whole we may not understand ; but we are here to play it and now 
 is our time. This we know : it is a part of action, not of whining. 
 It is a part of love, not cynicism. It is for us to express love in 
 terms of human helpfulness. This we know, for we have learned 
 
ANALYSIS. 153 
 
 from sad experience that any other course of life leads towards decay 
 and waste. — David Starr Jordan. 
 
 47. They tell us, sir, that we are weak, — unable to cope with so 
 formidable an adversary. But when shall we be stronger ? Will it 
 be the next week, or the next year? Shall we gather strength by 
 irresolution and inaction ? Sir, we are not weak, if we make a 
 proper use of those means which the God of nature hath placed in 
 our power. The battle, sir, is not to the strong alone : it is to the 
 vigilant, the active, the brave. If we were base enough to desire it, 
 it is now too late to retire from the contest. The war is inevitable, 
 — and let it come. Our brethren are already in the field. Why 
 stand we here idle ? Is life so dear, or peace so sweet, as to be pur- 
 chased at the price of chains and slavery ? Forbid it, Almighty God ! 
 I know not what course others may take ; but as for me, give me 
 liberty, or give me death ! — Patrick Henry. 
 
 48. The Memory of George Washington. — A hundred years hence 
 other disciples of Washington will celebrate his birth with no less of 
 sincere admiration than we now commemorate it. When they shall 
 meet as we now meet, to do themselves and him that honor, so 
 surely as they shall see the blue summits of his native mountains rise 
 in the horizon, so surely as they shall behold the river on whose 
 banks he lived, and on whose banks he rests, still flowing on towards 
 the sea, so surely may they see as we now see, the flag of the Union 
 floating on the top of the Capitol ; and then, as now, may the sun in 
 his course visit no land more free, more happy, more lovely than 
 this, our own country. — Webster. 
 
 49. The Birthday of Washington. — The birthday of the "Father 
 of his Country !" May it ever be freshly remembered by American 
 hearts ! May it ever reawaken in them a filial veneration for his 
 memory ; ever rekindle the fires of patriotic regard to the country 
 which he loved so well ; to which he gave his youthful vigor and his 
 youthful energy during the perilous period of the early Indian war- 
 fare ; to which he devoted his life, in the maturity of his powers, in 
 the field ; to which again he offered the counsels of his wisdom and 
 his experience as president of the convention that framed our Consti- 
 tution ; which he guided and directed while in the chair of state, and 
 
154 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 for which the last prayer of his earthly supplication was offered up 
 when it came the moment for him so well, and so grandly, and so 
 calmly to die ! He was the first man of the time in which he grew. 
 His memory is first and most sacred in our love ; and ever hereafter, 
 till the last drop of blood shall freeze in the last American heart, his 
 name shall be a spell of power and might. — Rufus Choate. 
 
 50. Books. — It is chiefly through books that we enjoy intercourse 
 with superior minds, and these invaluable means of communication 
 are in the reach of all. In the best books great men talk to us, give 
 us their most precious thoughts, and pour their souls into ours. 
 God be thanked for books ! They are the voices of the distant and 
 the dead, and make us heirs of the spiritual life of past ages. Books 
 are the true levellers. They give to all, who will faithfully use 
 them, the society, the spiritual presence of the best and greatest of 
 our race. No matter how poor I am — no matter though the pros- 
 perous of my own time will not enter my obscure dwelling — if the 
 sacred writers will enter and take up their abode under my roof, if 
 Milton will cross my threshold to sing to me of Paradise, and Shake- 
 speare to open to me the worlds of imagination and the workings of 
 the human heart, and Franklin to enrich me with his practical wis- 
 dom, I shall not pine for want of intellectual companionship, and I 
 may become a cultivated man ; though excluded from what is called 
 the best society in the place where I live. — Channing. 
 
 Punctuation. 
 
 Punctuation is the art of applying certain points or 
 marks to composition, in such a way as will present the 
 sense to the best advantage. 
 
 TO TEACHER AND STUDENT : The division of 
 composition into sentences and parts of sentences 
 is made according 1 to the grammatical sense. It is 
 -well to understand, at the outset, that punctuation 
 varies with all the varieties of style. An author 
 may differently punctuate the same paragraph, and 
 correctly each time according to his view and feel- 
 ings at the time. 
 
PUNCTUATION. 155 
 
 Pauses are relative rather than absolute. A semicolon 
 requires a longer pause than a comma ; a colon, longer 
 than a semicolon ; a period, longer than a colon. The 
 other points require pauses which depend chiefly on the 
 sense. Grave or solemn discourse requires longer pauses 
 than that which is lively and spirited. Punctuation marks 
 are used to mark the sense rather than the pauses. A pause 
 should generally be made where there is a point, but it does 
 not follow that a point should be used wherever there is a 
 pause. Punctuation is something more than a matter of 
 individual taste. There are rules which govern the princi- 
 pal uses of the most important points. Master these. 
 
 Punctuation marks are used to separate entire sentences 
 or the elements of sentences. The elements of a sentence 
 are the words, phrases, and clauses which perform distinct 
 offices in the sentence. 
 
 The principal punctuation marks are the comma (,), the 
 semicolon (;), the colon (:), the period (.), the interrogation 
 'point (?), the exclamation point (!), the hyphen (-), the apos- 
 trophe ('), the dash ( — ), the parenthesis, quotation marks. 
 
 The Comma. 1. The comma is used to mark the omis- 
 sion of a word, especially the verb ; as, Dido built Carthage ; 
 Romulus, Rome. The one prudence of life is concentra- 
 tion ; the one evil, dissipation. 
 
 2. The comma is used when the subject ends with a verb 
 and the predicate begins with one ; as, Whatever is, is right. 
 To say that he sleeps, is to say that he is better. 
 
 3. The comma is used to separate independent expres- 
 sions from the rest of the sentence ; as, John, come to me. 
 To confess the truth, I was in error. Generally speaking, 
 little can be done during this month. 
 
156 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 4. The comma is used to separate words and phrases in 
 the same construction except when there are only two 
 words or phrases and they are connected by conjunctions ; 
 as, The good, the true, and the beautiful are found in all 
 grades of life. The good man is alive to all the sympathies, 
 the sanctions, and the loves of social existence. He sees 
 the evil and the good. Horses, cattle, sheep, and hogs are 
 among the chief products of the farm. 
 
 5. The comma is used to separate words and phrases used 
 as appositives ; as, Plato, the philosopher, wrote many books. 
 Moses, the servant of the Lord, died in the land of Moab. 
 
 6. The comma, is used to separate words or phrases out 
 of their natural order from the rest of the sentence ; as, 
 This, on the contrary, is not included. He felt, however, 
 that he ought to have gone. 
 
 7. The comma is used before direct quotations ; as, He 
 replied, " I am not certain of this." God said, " Let there 
 be light." 
 
 8. The comma should be used when, in any case, the 
 meaning would be doubtful or ambiguous without it. 
 
 As an example of the effect of pointing, see the change 
 of meaning in the following words : 
 
 James Johnson says he has written beautifully. James, Johnson says 
 he has written beautifully. "James Johnson," says he, " has writ- 
 ten beautifully. ' ' James Johnson says he has written ' ' beautifully. ' ' 
 
 The Semicolon. 1. The semicolon is used to separate 
 the members of a compound sentence when the conjunc- 
 tion is omitted, or when the connection is not close ; as, 
 Life is short; art is long. A clownish air is but a small 
 defect ; yet it is enough to make a man disagreeable. Make 
 use of your time ; for the loss of it can never be regained. 
 
PUNCTUATION. 157 
 
 2. The semicolon is used before as, viz., to wit, namely, 
 etc. ; the comma should be used after them ; as, Pronouns 
 are divided into four principal classes ; namely, Personal, 
 Relative, Adjective, Interrogative. There are only two ex- 
 ceptions to this statement ; to wit, the adjectives this and 
 that. He proposed to visit the three largest cities in the 
 United States ; viz., New York, Chicago, and Philadelphia. 
 
 The Colon. 1. The colon is now but little used except 
 before examples following as follows, the following examples ; 
 as, Perform the following examples : He used these words : 
 
 2. The colon is used to separate the terms of a propor- 
 tion ; as, A : B : : C : D. 
 
 The Period. 1. The period is used at the close of 
 declarative and imperative sentences ; as, Knowledge is 
 useful and honorable. Know thyself. 
 
 2. The period is used after abreviations ; as, I invited 
 Mr. and Mrs. Jones. St. Louis, Mo. Philadelphia, Pa. 
 
 The Interrogation Point. The interrogation point is 
 used at the close of an interrogative sentence ; as, Who is 
 that man ? What can I do for you ? 
 
 The Exclamation Point. The exclamation point is used 
 after exclamatory words and phrases, and after sentences 
 expressing strong emotion ; as, Lost ! Lost ! that I were 
 at home ! the long and dreary winter ! How unsearch- 
 able are his ways ! 
 
 The Hyphen. The hyphen is used to separate the parts 
 of a compound word ; as, Self-evident. Well-established. 
 Self-reliance. 
 
 The Dash. The dash is used where there is an unex- 
 pected transition in the sentence, or where a sentence is 
 
158 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 left unfinished ; as, He sometimes takes counsel and some- 
 times — snuff. But I must first — . The colonists— such is 
 human nature — desired to burn the town in which they 
 had been so wretched. 
 
 The Parenthesis. The parenthesis is used to enclose an 
 explanation, or other matter not belonging to the gram- 
 matical construction of the sentence ; as, Consider (and 
 may the consideration sink deep into your hearts) the fatal 
 consequences of a wicked life. 
 
 Quotation Marks. Quotation marks are used before 
 and after a passage quoted in the exact language of another ; 
 as, He said, " I relinquish my claim." Johnson replied, 
 " I am too tired to work to-day." 
 
 The Apostrophe. The apostrophe is used in the pos- 
 sessive case of nouns, and to denote the plural of figures 
 and letters, and the omission of a letter ; as, John's hat, 
 men's shoes, 2's, 7's, p's, q's, I've, FU, Don't, o'er. 
 
 The Underscore. The underscore is used in writing to 
 denote general emphasis or distinction. One line drawn 
 under a word, phrase, or clause means that the word, 
 phrase, or clause is to be printed in italic; as, "We must 
 fight; I repeat it, sir, we must fight." Here J reign king. 
 
 " An hour or two, and forth she goes, 
 The school she brightly seeks ; 
 She carries in her hand a rose, 
 And two upon her cheeks. ' ' 
 
 Italics are generally used to distinguish what is spoken 
 of as a mere letter, word, phrase, or sentence ; as, A wants 
 ye to make it aye. Which may be applied to phrases or 
 clauses but that only to nouns or pronouns. That the earth 
 is round is admitted. 
 
EXERCISE IN PUNCTUATION. 159 
 
 To denote still greater emphasis than italics would 
 express, capital letters should be used. Two lines drawn 
 under an element denotes small capitals ; three lines, 
 CAPITALS. 
 
 Exercise in Punctuation. 
 
 A Country Parsonage. 
 
 [From Goldsmith's " Vicar of Wakefield."] 
 
 This beautiful word-picture shows that happiness depends not on 
 circumstances, but on constitution — that " The mind is its own place, 
 that it can make a heaven of hell or a hell of heaven. ' ' 
 
 Explain the reason for the use of each punctuation mark 
 used in the following extract : 
 
 The place of our retreat was in a little neighborhood consisting 
 of farmers, who tilled their own grounds, and were equal strangers 
 to opulence and poverty. As they had almost all the conveniences 
 of life within themselves, they seldom visited towns or cities, in 
 search of superfluities. Remote from the polite, they still retained 
 the primeval simplicity of manners ; and frugal by habit, they 
 scarcely knew that temperance was a virtue. They wrought with 
 cheerfulness on days of labor, but observed festivals as intervals of 
 idleness and pleasure. They kept up the Christmas carol, sent true- 
 love-knots on Valentine morning, eat pancakes on Shrove-tide, 
 showed their wit on the first of April, and religiously cracked nuts on 
 Michaelmas eve. Being apprised of our approach, the whole neigh- 
 borhood came out to meet their minister, dressed in their finest 
 clothes, and preceded by a pipe and tabor. A feast also was provided 
 for our reception, at which we sat cheerfully down ; and what the 
 conversation wanted in wit, was made up in laughter. 
 
 Our little habitation was situated at the foot of a sloping hill, 
 sheltered with a beautiful underwood behind, and a prattling river 
 before, on one side a meadow, on the other a green. My farm con- 
 sisted of about twenty acres of excellent land, having given an hun- 
 
160 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 dred pound for my predecessor's good-will. Nothing could exceed 
 the neatness of my little inclosures, the elms and hedgerows appear- 
 ing with inexpressible beauty. My house consisted of but one story, 
 and was covered with thatch, which gave it an air of great snugness. 
 The walls on the inside were nicely whitewashed, and my daughters 
 undertook to adorn them with pictures of their own designing. 
 Though the same room served us for parlor and kitchen, that only 
 made it the warmer. Besides, as it was kept with the utmost neat- 
 ness, the dishes, plates, and coppers being well scoured, and all dis- 
 posed in bright rows on the shelves, the eye was agreeably relieved, 
 and did not want richer furniture. There were three other apart- 
 ments, one for my wife and me, another for our two daughters, 
 within our own, and the third, with two beds, for the rest of the 
 children. 
 
 The little republic to which I gave laws, was regulated in the 
 following manner : by sunrise we all assembled in our common 
 apartment, the fire being previously kindled by the servant. After 
 we had saluted each other with proper ceremony, for I always thought 
 fit to keep up some mechanical forms of good breeding, without 
 which freedom ever destroys friendship, we all bent in gratitude to 
 that Being who gave us another day. This duty being performed, 
 my son and I went to pursue our usual industry abroad, while my 
 wife and daughters employed themselves in providing breakfast, 
 which was always ready at a certain time. I allowed half an hour 
 for this meal, and an hour for dinner ; which time was taken up in 
 innocent mirth between my wife and daughters, and in philosophical 
 arguments between my son and me. 
 
 As we rose with the sun, so we never pursued our labors after it 
 was gone down, but returned home to the expecting family ; where 
 smiling looks, a neat hearth, and pleasant fire were prepared for our 
 reception. Nor were we without guests : sometimes farmer Flam- 
 borough, our talkative neighbor, and often the blind piper would pay 
 us a visit, and taste our gooseberry wine, for the making of which we 
 had lost neither the receipt nor the reputation. These harmless peo- 
 ple had several ways of being good company ; while one played, the 
 other would sing some soothing ballad, " Johnny Armstrong's Last 
 
EXERCISES IN PUNCTUATION. 161 
 
 Good Night," or "The Cruelty of Barbary Allen." The night was 
 concluded in the manner we began the morning, my youngest boys 
 being appointed to read the lessons of the day ; and he that read 
 loudest, distinctest, and best, was to have an halfpenny on Sunday to 
 put in the poor's box. 
 
 When Sunday came, it was indeed a day of finery, which all my 
 sumptuary edicts could not restrain. How well soever I fancied my 
 lectures against pride had conquered the vanity of my daughters, yet 
 I found them still secretly attached to all their former finery : they 
 still loved laces, ribbons, bugles, and catgut. My wife herself re- 
 tained a passion for her crimson paduasoy, because I formerly hap- 
 pened to say it became her. 
 
 The first Sunday in particular their behavior served to mortify 
 me. I had desired my girls the preceding night to be dressed early 
 the next day ; for I always loved to be at church a good while before 
 the rest of the congregation. They punctually obeyed my directions ; 
 but when we were to assemble in the morning at breakfast, down 
 came my wife and daughters, dressed out all in their former splendor, 
 their hair plastered up with pomatum, their faces patched to taste, 
 their trains bundled up in a heap behind, and rustling at every 
 motion. I could not help smiling at their vanity, particularly that 
 of my wife, from whom I expected more discretion. In this exi- 
 gence, therefore, my only resource was to order my son, with an 
 important air, to call our coach. The girls were amazed at the com- 
 mand ; but I repeated it with more solemnity than before. — " Surely, 
 my dear, you jest," cried my wife, " we can walk it perfectly well : we 
 want no coach to carry us now." — "You mistake, child," returned I, 
 * ' we do want a coach ; for if we walk to church in this trim, the very 
 children in the parish will hoot after us." — "Indeed," replied my 
 wife, "I always imagined that my Charles was fond of seeing his 
 children neat and handsome about him." — "You may be as neat as 
 you please," interrupted I, " and I shall love you the better for it ; but 
 all this is not neatness, but frippery. These rufflings, and pinkings, 
 and patchings will only make us hated by all the wives of all our 
 neighbors. No, my children," continued I, more gravely, "those 
 gowns may be altered into something of a plainer cut ; for finery is 
 
 11 
 
162 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 very unbecoming in us, who want the means of decency. I do not 
 know whether such flouncing and shredding is becoming even in the 
 rich, if we consider, upon a moderate calculation, that the naked- 
 ness of the indigent world may be clothed from the trimmings of 
 the vain." 
 
 This remonstrance had the proper effect ; they went with great 
 composure, that very instant, to change their dress ; and the next 
 day I had the satisfaction of finding my daughters, at their own re- 
 quest, employed in cutting up their trains into Sunday waistcoats for 
 Dick and Bill, the two little ones ; and what was still more satisfac- 
 tory, the gowns seemed improved by this curtailing. 
 
 The Paragraph. 
 
 A paragraph is a distinct subdivision of writing relating to 
 a particular point. It may consist of one or of many sen- 
 tences. 
 
 There are no definite rules as to the length of a para- 
 graph. The number of paragraphs in a composition is 
 determined by the number of points which the writer wishes 
 to make distinct. It is a well-established belief that the 
 effectiveness of written matter may be increased by dividing 
 it into distinct divisions, by indicating where the discussion 
 of a topic ends and where the discussion of the next topic 
 begins. A new paragraph should begin where there is a 
 change in the specific topic. 
 
 While no specific rules can be given for the construction 
 of paragraphs, the paragraph can be considered and under- 
 stood. The indifference with which untrained writers — and 
 many authors — regard this important element of composi- 
 tion warrants the assertion that the subject of paragraph- 
 ing receives too little attention in the schools. Pupils in the 
 grammar grades can be trained to group sentences which 
 are closely related in thought into a paragraph. 
 
THE PARAGRAPH. 163 
 
 Study of the Paragraph. 
 
 Every group of sentences closely related in thought should 
 be grouped together. Such grouping facilitates the appre- 
 hension of the writer's thoughts and improves the appear- 
 ance of the written or printed page. The page of a school- 
 book or of a literary work would present a monotonous 
 appearance if it were unbroken. Pupils in the grades, 
 especially those in the high school, should criticise their 
 compositions by paragraphs. Composition should be revised 
 until it is concise and correctly divided into paragraphs. 
 
 The pupil will study the following selection by paragraphs, 
 giving, according to the preceding definition and suggestions, 
 a clear reason for each subdivision or paragraph. The main 
 point to understand clearly is that a new paragraph should 
 begin where there is a change in the specific topic ; that 
 is, where another feature of the main subject is presented. 
 
 ADVICE TO BOYS. 
 
 1. Upon whatever career you may enter, intellectual quickness, in- 
 dustry, and the power of bearing fatigue are three great advantages. 
 But I want to impress upon you, and through you upon those who will 
 direct your future course, the conviction which I entertain that, as 
 a general rule, the relative importance of these three qualifications is 
 not rightly estimated ; and that there are other qualities of no less 
 value which are not directly tested by school competition. 
 
 2. A somewhat varied experience of men has led me, the longer I 
 live, to set the less value upon mere cleverness ; to attach more and 
 more importance to industry and to physical endurance. Indeed, I 
 am much disposed to think that endurance is the most valuable quality 
 of all ; for industry, as the desire to work hard, does not come to 
 much if a feeble frame is unable to respond to the desire. 
 
 3. Everybody who has had to make his way in the world must 
 know that while the occasion for intellectual effort of a high order is 
 
164 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 rare, it constantly happens that a man's future turns upon his being 
 able to stand a sudden and heavy strain upon his powers of endurance. 
 To a lawyer, a physician, or a merchant, it may be everything to be 
 able to work sixteen hours a day for as long as is needful, without 
 yielding up to weariness. 
 
 4. Moreover, the patience, tenacity, and good humor which are 
 among the most important qualifications for dealing with men, are in- 
 compatible with an irritable brain, a weak stomach, or a defective 
 circulation. If any one of you prize-winners were a son of mine, and 
 a good fairy were to offer to equip him according to my wishes for the 
 battle of practical life, I should say, " I do not care to trouble you for 
 any more cleverness ; put in as much industry as you can instead ; 
 and, if you please, a broad, deep chest, and a stomach of whose exist- 
 ence he shall never know anything." I should be well content with 
 the prospects of a fellow so endowed. 
 
 5. The other point which I wish to impress upon you is, that com- 
 petitive examination, useful and excellent as it is for some purposes, 
 is only a very partial test of what the winners will be worth in practi- 
 cal life. There are people who are neither very clever, nor very in- 
 dustrious, nor very strong, and who would probably be nowhere in an 
 examination, and who yet exert a great influence in virtue of what is 
 called force of character. 
 
 6. They may not know much, but they take care that what they do 
 know they know well. They may not be very quick, but the knowl- 
 edge they acquire sticks. They may not even be particularly indus- 
 trious or enduring, but they are strong of will and firm of purpose, 
 undaunted by fear of responsibility, single-minded and trustworthy. 
 
 7. In practical life, a man of this sort is worth any number of 
 merely clever and learned people. Of course I do not mean to imply 
 for a moment that success in examination is incompatible with the 
 possession of character, such as I have just defined it, but failure in 
 examination is no evidence of the want of such character. 
 
 8. And this leads me to administer, from my point of view, the 
 crumb of comfort which on these occasions is ordinarily offered to 
 those whose names do not appear upon the prize-list. It is quite true 
 that practical life is a kind of long competitive examination, conducted 
 
THE PARAGRAPH. 165 
 
 by that severe pedagogue, Professor Circumstance. Rut my experi- 
 ence leads me to conclude that his marks are given much more for 
 character than for cleverness. 
 
 9. Hence, though I have no doubt that those boys who have received 
 prizes to-day, have already given rise to a fair hope that the future may 
 see them prominent, perhaps brilliantly distinguished members of 
 society, yet neither do I think it at all unlikely that among the undis- 
 tinguished crowd there may lie the making of some simple soldier 
 whose practical sense and indomitable courage may save an army led 
 by characterless cleverness to the brink of destruction ; or some plain 
 man of business, who, by dint of sheer honesty and firmness, may 
 slowly and surely rise to prosperity and honor, when his more bril- 
 liant compeers, for lack of character, have gone down, with all who 
 trusted them, to hopeless ruin. 
 
 10. Such things do happen. Hence let none of you be discouraged. 
 Those who have won prizes have made a good beginning ; those who 
 have not may yet make that good ending which is better than a good 
 beginning. No life is wasted unless it ends in sloth, dishonesty, or 
 cowardice. No success is worthy of the name unless it is won by 
 honest industry and brave breasting of the waves of fortune. 
 
 11. Unless at the end of life some exhalation of the dawn still hangs 
 about the palpable and the familiar ; unless there is some transforma- 
 tion of the real into the best dreams of youth, depend upon it, what- 
 ever outward success may have gathered round a man, he is but an 
 elaborate and a mischievous failure. — Professor Huxley. 
 
 TO THE TEACHER: An educated and trained 
 teacher does not accept the mere recitation of text- 
 book definitions and rules as evidence that the pupil 
 understands them and can use them. The teacher 
 -who accepts memory recitations, without requiring" 
 ample original illustrations by the pupil, is never 
 certain that the pupil understands or that he can 
 use his learning. Method should train the pupil 
 to think for himself. Helping a pupil to help him- 
 self is the only help the pupil should ever receive 
 from the teacher. " Gifts do not enrich." 
 
166 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Make two paragraphs out of each of the following quota- 
 tions : 
 
 Books. — It is chiefly through books that we enjoy intercourse with 
 superior minds, and these invaluable means of communication are in 
 the reach of all. In the best books great men talk to us, give us their 
 most precious thoughts, and pour their souls into ours. God be 
 thanked for books. They are the voices of the distant and the dead, 
 and make us heirs of the spiritual life of past ages. Books are the true 
 levellers. They give to all, who will faithfully use them, the society, 
 the spiritual presence of the best and greatest of our race. No matter 
 how poor I am, — no matter though the prosperous of my own time will 
 not enter my obscure dwelling, — if the sacred writers will enter and 
 take up their abode under my roof, — if Milton will cross my threshold 
 to sing to me of Paradise, and Shakespeare to open to me the worlds 
 of imagination and the workings of the human heart, and Franklin 
 to enrich me with his practical wisdom, I shall not pine for want of 
 intellectual companionship, and I may become a cultivated man, 
 though excluded from what is called the best society in the place 
 where I live. — Channing. 
 
 Education in the United States. — For the purpose of public 
 instruction, we hold every man subject to taxation in proportion 
 to his property, and we look not to the question whether he him- 
 self have or have not children to be benefited by the education for 
 which he pays. We regard it as a wise and liberal system of police, 
 by which property and life and the peace of society are secured. We 
 hope to excite a feeling of responsibility and a sense of character, 
 by enlarging the capacity and increasing the sphere of intellectual 
 enjoyment. By general instruction, we seek, as far as possible, 
 to purify the whole moral atmosphere ; to keep good sentiments 
 uppermost, and to turn the strong current of feeling and opinion, as 
 well as the censures of the law and the denunciation of religion, 
 against immorality and crime. Education, to accomplish the ends of 
 good government, should be universally diffused. — Daniel Webster. 
 
THE PARAGRAPH. 167 
 
 Make four paragraphs out of the following selection : 
 
 Poetry is the record of the best and happiest moments of the happiest 
 and best minds. We are aware of evanescent visitations of thought 
 and feeling, sometimes associated with place or person, sometimes 
 regarding our own mind alone, and always arising unforeseen and de- 
 parting unbidden, but elevating and delightful beyond all expression ; 
 so that even in the desire and the regret they leave, there cannot but 
 be pleasure, participating as it does in the nature of its object. It is, 
 as it were, the interpenetration of a diviner nature through our own ; 
 but its footsteps are like those of a wind over the sea, which the com- 
 ing calm erases, and whose traces remain only, as on the wrinkled 
 sand which paves it. These and corresponding conditions of being 
 are experienced principally by those of the most delicate sensibility 
 and the most enlarged imagination ; and the state of mind produced by 
 them is at war with every base desire. The enthusiasm of virtue, love, 
 patriotism, and friendship is essentially linked with such emotions ; 
 and whilst they last, self appears as what it is, an atom to a universe. 
 Poets are not only subject to these experiences as spirits of the most 
 refined organization, but they can color all that they combine with 
 the evanescent hues of this ethereal world. A word, a trait, in the 
 representation of a scene or a passion will touch the enchanted chord, 
 and reanimate, in those who have ever experienced these emotions, 
 the sleeping, the cold, the buried image of the past. Poetry thus 
 makes immortal all that is best and most beautiful in the world ; it 
 arrests the vanishing apparitions which haunt the interlineations of 
 life, and, veiling them, or in language or in form, sends them forth 
 among mankind, bearing sweet news of kindred joy to those with 
 whom their sisters abide — abide, because there is no portal of expres- 
 sion from the caverns of the spirit which they inhabit into the universe 
 of things. Poetry redeems from decay the visitations of the divinity 
 in man. — Shelly. 
 
EXERCISE XXII. 
 Faulty Diction. 
 
 Man, in fact, only obtains the use of his faculties in obtaining the 
 use of speech, for language is the indispensable means of the devel- 
 opment of his natural powers, whether intellectual or moral. — Sir 
 William Hamilton. 
 
 The right use of words is not a matter to be left to pedants and 
 pedagogues. It belongs to the daily life of every man. The misuse 
 of words confuses ideas, and impairs the value of language as a means 
 of communication. Hence loss of time, of money, and sore trial of 
 patience. It is significant that we call a quarrel a misunderstanding. 
 — Richard Grant White. 
 
 11 1 went to the club last night," writes Oliver Wendell Holmes in 
 one of those delightful letters of his to John Lothrop Motley, "and 
 met some of the friends you always like to hear of. I sat by the side 
 of Emerson, who always charms me with his delicious voice, his fine 
 sense and wit, and the delicate way he steps about among the words 
 of his vocabulary, — if you have seen a cat picking her footsteps in wet 
 weather, you have seen the picture of Emerson's exquisite intelligence, 
 feeling for its phrase or epithet. Sometimes I think of an ant-eater 
 singling out his insects, as I see him looking about and at last seizing 
 his noun or adjective, — the best, the only one that would serve the 
 need of his thought. 1 ' — Life and Letters of Oliver Wendell Holmes. 
 
 You might read all the books in the British Museum (if you could 
 live long enough), and still remain an utterly "illiterate," uneducated 
 person ; but if you read ten pages of a good book, letter by letter, — 
 that is to say, with real accuracy, — you are forevermore in some meas- 
 ure an educated person. ... A well-educated gentleman may not 
 know many languages, — may not be able to speak any but his own, 
 — may have read very few books. But whatever language he knows 
 he knows precisely. — John Buskin. 
 168 
 
FAULTY DICTION. 169 
 
 An accurate knowledge and a correct and felicitous use of words 
 are. of themselves, almost sure proofs of good breeding. No doubt it 
 marks a weak mind to care more for the casket than for the jewel it 
 contains — to prefer elegantly turned sentences to sound sense ; but 
 sound sense always acquires additional value when expressed in pure 
 English. Moreover, he who carefully studies accuracy of expression, 
 the proper choice and arrangement of words in any language, will be 
 also advancing towards accuracy of thought as well as towards pro- 
 priety and energy of speech, "for divers philosophers hold," says 
 Shakespeare, "that the lip is parcel of the mind." Few things are 
 more ludicrous than the blunders by which even persons moving in 
 refined society often betray the grossest ignorance of very common 
 words. — William Mathews. 
 
 The English language abounds in synonyms, or words of 
 similar, but not quite identical, meaning. These words 
 must be carefully distinguished, for on the understanding of 
 these differences is based the mastery of English. 
 
 The following brief discussion of the right and the wrong 
 use of words is given in the hope that it will call the atten- 
 tion of the pupil to the importance of choosing the right 
 word and stimulate him to a further study of this subject. 
 
 In the choice of words, we have to consider the selection 
 of such words as express, with accuracy, what is meant, 
 their adaptability to the writer's purpose, and their appro- 
 priateness to the matter in hand. 
 
 The following books of reference should be found on 
 every teacher's desk : " The Verbalist," by Alfred Ayres ; 
 "Words and their Uses," by Richard Grant White; 
 "Words, their Use and Abuse," by William Mathews; 
 "Synonyms, Antonyms, and Prepositions," by James E. 
 Fernald. 
 
170 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 TO THE TEACHER: The examples of faulty 
 diction here given, though few, are sufficient to 
 illustrate the clauses of faulty usage the pupil should 
 guard against. 
 
 Require the pupil to use the words briefly dis- 
 cussed in this lesson in original sentences. Require 
 him to bring to the class other words that are often 
 misused and show why one should be chosen in 
 preference to the other. This subject can be indefi- 
 nitely enlarged by the teacher. 
 
 And. And is often misused for to ; as, " Come and see 
 me." " Try and do what you can for him." " Go and see 
 your brother." In such sentences use fo, not and. 
 
 All over. "The disease spread all over the country." 
 Say " The disease spread over all the country." 
 
 Adjective, Adverb. If a phrase denoting manner could 
 be substituted, the adverb should be used ; but if some part 
 of the verb to be could be employed as a connective, the ad- 
 jective is required ; as, " The physician felt his pulse care- 
 fully [that is, in a careful manner] and observed that the 
 patient's hand felt cold [that is, was cold to the touch]." 
 It is correct to say, " He feels sad." " It looks bad." " It 
 smells sweet." 
 
 Apprehend, Comprehend. Apprehend is often misused 
 for comprehend. Perception apprehends; conception com- 
 prehends. Both express an effort of the thinking faculty. 
 To apprehend is simply to take an idea into the mind ; to 
 comprehend an idea is fully to understand it in its various 
 relations to what is already in the mind. 
 
 Apt, Liable, Likely. Apt implies natural fitness or ten- 
 dency ; as, " He is an apt scholar." " An impetuous person 
 
FAULTY DICTION. 171 
 
 is apt to speak sharply. 1 ' Likely is used of a contingent 
 event that is probable, and, usually, favorable; as, u An 
 industrious student is likely to succeed." Liable refers to 
 an unfavorable contingency ; as, " The ship is liable to sink 
 at any time." 
 
 Angry, Mad. Angry means roused by indignation or 
 resentment ; mad usually means disordered in mind, lunatic, 
 insane. It is well to preserve the distinction between these 
 words, though some of our best writers use mad in the sense 
 of angry. 
 
 Authentic, Genuine. Genuine means true or real as op- 
 posed to what is spurious or supposititious ; authentic, that 
 which possesses authority or is trustworthy. A book whose 
 statements on any subject are in accordance with facts is 
 authentic; a book is genuine if written by the author to 
 whom it is attributed, but may be absolutely unreliable. 
 
 Above. Frequently used as an adjective, as in u the 
 above statement," " the above incidents did not occur as was 
 stated in the despatch." If the statement is something that 
 is previously mentioned in the text it is better to say " the 
 foregoing" or " the preceding statement." If reference is 
 made to incidents outside the text that have been men- 
 tioned previously to what is now being said, " the above-men- 
 tioned facts," " the incidents related above" may be used. 
 
 Alone, Solitary. Alone means unaccompanied, single. 
 A traveller without companions is alone. Solitary refers 
 more to one's mental or social isolation from surrounding 
 affairs or people. " Solitude is not measured by the miles 
 of space that intervene between a man and his fellows. 
 
172 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 The really diligent student in one of the crowded hives of 
 Cambridge College is as solitary as a dervis in the desert." 
 
 Avocation, Vocation. Vocation means one's regular 
 calling or business, as banking, printing ; avocation is that 
 which furnishes amusement or pleasure aside from regular 
 business, as music, hunting. A man's vocation may be 
 printing, and his avocation amateur photography. "The 
 work has been prepared chiefly in the leisure taken from 
 active duties, and from time to time has been delayed by 
 other avocations. 1 '' 
 
 Allude, Mention, Refer. Allude is very frequently mis- 
 used for mention, refer. We allude to events or to things 
 when we do not distinctly mention or directly refer to them. 
 Allusion implies a knowledge of the subject on the part of 
 the reader or the hearer. " He was not familiar with the 
 allusions of English literature, and had often to consult the 
 dictionary." " The lecturer did not refer to the incidents of 
 the Crimean War." 
 
 Aggravate, Provoke. Aggravate signifies to make heavy, 
 to make worse, as "aggravating circumstances" in criminal 
 law phrase means circumstances that increase the gravity 
 of a crime. Provoke means to act in a way to excite anger 
 or resentment. 
 
 Among one another. " They exchanged confidences 
 among one another." Say "among themselves" or "with 
 one another." 
 
 At, in. Use at if the place is regarded as a point ; in, if 
 it is inclusive ; as, " We arrived at Paris." " He lives in 
 London." Say " Where is it?" not " Where is it a*.*"— the 
 at is redundant. 
 
FAULTY DICTION. 173 
 
 And, or. And is often used where or is required ; as, " A 
 language like the French and German contains as many 
 words." "A language like the French or the German," 
 since no language is at once French and German. 
 
 Approach, Address, Petition. Do not use approach for 
 address or petition. Approach is often used in a bad sense, 
 implying the use of bribery or intrigue. " The teachers 
 petitioned the superintendent for longer intermissions," not 
 approached or addressed him. 
 
 Ain't. A modification of am not, or are not. Always in- 
 elegant — a vulgarism. 
 
 Awful, Awfully. Colloquial slang, for very or exceedingly ; 
 as, " An awfully jolly crowd ;" " an awful good time ;" 
 " awfully nice." 
 
 Answer, Reply. Discriminate in the use of these two 
 words. We answer a question, and reply to an assertion. 
 We answer letters and reply to arguments they may contain. 
 
 Back out. An Americanism for retreat. Say retreat. 
 
 Been to. " Where have you been tof Omit the super- 
 fluous to. 
 
 Both. This word is redundant in the following sentences : 
 " They both resemble each other very much." " They are 
 both alike." " They both met in the street." Its use in the 
 foregoing sentences is absurb. 
 
 Big, Great. Big is often misused for great; as, " He is a 
 big man," instead of a great man. A big man may be very 
 far from being a great man. 
 
174 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 But what should not be used for but that in such ex- 
 pressions as, " I do not know but what I did." Say but that 
 I did. 
 
 But yet should not be used when either but or yet is 
 sufficient by itself; as, "Wealth may seek us, but wisdom 
 must be sought." 
 
 But. This word is often misused. It is frequently used 
 for that; as, "I do not doubt but he will go;" read doubt 
 that. " I have no doubt but that he will go ;" suppress but. 
 But is also improperly used for than ; as, " No other re- 
 source but this was allowed him ;" read, than this. 
 
 Blame it on. A gross and inexcusable vulgarism which 
 we often hear from persons of considerable culture. " He 
 blames it on his brother." Say accuses or suspects his brother 
 of having done it. 
 
 Character, Reputation. A man's character is what he 
 essentially is; his reputation, what folk think he is. Mr. 
 John Doe's character may be unequivocally bad and his rep- 
 utation good, or the reverse. 
 
 Citizen is frequently misused for person by newspaper 
 writers and others desirous of using large words which are 
 " full of sound and fury, signifying nothing." Oiiizen should 
 be used only when speaking of persons in their relations as 
 citizens, in distinction from officials. 
 
 Compare To or With. We compare one thing with 
 another to note points of agreement or difference. We com- 
 pare one thing to another which we believe it resembles. 
 
 Circumstances — Under or In. There is a nice distinc- 
 tion in the use of prepositions with this word. When the 
 idea to be conveyed is mere situation it is expressed by in 
 
FAULTY DICTION. 175 
 
 the circumstances ; action affected is performed under the 
 circumstances. 
 
 Can, May. Can is often misused for may. Can refers 
 to some form of possibility ; may, to simple permission ; as, 
 " Can I pass the guard ?" " May [not can] I use your ruler ?" 
 
 Curious. This word is often misused. Curious means 
 inquisitive, prying. Its use instead of strange or remarkable 
 is common ; as, " A curious fact. 1 ' " A curious proceeding. 1 ' 
 Say a remarkable fact ; a strange proceeding. 
 
 Dirt, Earth. The phrase, " a dirt road, 1 ' for earth, clay, 
 gravel, or ground, that is, an unpaved road, is entirely inde- 
 fensible. Dirt, which has been termed "matter out of 
 place,' 1 means filth. Some even speak of " clean dirt," 
 which is an evident contradiction in terms. There can be 
 no such thing. 
 
 Differ With, From. In the use of these prepositions, 
 some writers recognize a nice distinction. Both phrases 
 have been used to express " difference in opinion ;" but 
 differ from is preferable for this, as differ with has been re- 
 garded as being reserved for " have a difference with," that 
 is, a conflicting opinion. Differ from is always to be used 
 when the sense is " different from ;" as, " Washington dif- 
 fered from Hamilton in temperament, but did not differ 
 with him in political theory." 
 
 Don't, a contraction of do not, should be used only in 
 the first person singular or in the plural ; as, " I donH know." 
 " They donH care." " He doesn't know any better." 
 
 Enough, Sufficient. A man has sufficient when he has 
 what he needs ; enough when he has all he desires. A miser 
 may have sufficient, but never has enough money. 
 
176 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Even up. A slang expression much used in the South 
 and West, signifying " to get even with." 
 
 Equally as well. A common redundancy. Omit the as. 
 Say equally well or quite as well. 
 
 Elegant, Splendid. These words are very frequently 
 used when the speaker means to say fine, as in such expres- 
 sions as " an elegant day," " a splendid piece of roast beef." 
 Splendid is from a Latin adjective, splendidus, meaning bright, 
 shining, brilliant. A jeweller's tray of diamonds may be 
 splendid; the sun is splendid. Elegant means marked by 
 refinement, exhibiting taste and delicacy of finish ; as, u He 
 had not expected to find so much taste for elegant literature 
 in an old village deacon." 
 
 Education. " This is one of the most misused of words. 
 A man may be well acquainted with the contents of text- 
 books, and yet be a person of little education; on the other 
 hand, a man may be a person of good education, and yet 
 know little of the contents of text-books. Abraham Lincoln 
 and Edwin Forrest knew comparatively little of what is 
 generally learned in schools ; still they were men of culture, 
 men of education. A man may have ever so much book- 
 knowledge and still be a boor ; but a man cannot be a per- 
 son of good education and not be — so far as manner is 
 concerned — a gentleman. Education, then, is the whole of 
 which Instruction and Breeding are the parts. The man or 
 the woman — even in this democratic country of ours — who 
 deserves the title of gentleman or lady is always a person of 
 education ; i.e., he or she has a sufficient acquaintance with 
 books and with the usages of social intercourse to acquit 
 himself or herself creditably in the society of cultivated peo- 
 ple. Not moral worth, nor learning, nor wealth, nor all 
 
FAULTY DICTION. 177 
 
 three combined, can unaided make a gentleman, for with 
 all three a man might be uneducated, — coarse, unbred, un- 
 schooled in those things which alone make men welcome in 
 the society of the refined. — Alfred Ayres. 
 
 Except, Unless. Except is often used when unless should 
 be used ; as, " No one need apply except he is thoroughly 
 familiar with the business." No one need apply unless 
 he is familiar with the business. 
 
 Either. This word means the one or the other of two. 
 " Give me either of them," — that is, give me the one or the 
 other of two. We should not say, " Give me either" in 
 referring to more than two. 
 
 From, Of. From is often misused for of; as, " He died 
 from cholera." Say, he died of cholera. We may say he 
 died from the effects of cholera. 
 
 Fetch, Carry, Bring. Fetch means to go and bring, hence 
 it is clearly wrong to use such expressions as " go and fetch 
 me a drink of water." Carry often implies the meaning 
 from, and is followed by the preposition away and from, 
 thus being opposed to fetch and bring. 
 
 Friend, Acquaintance. " & friend is one with whom you 
 may be sincere ;" an acquaintance may be one about whom 
 you know little. One may have few friends, but many ac- 
 quaintances ; hence, he who is desirous to call things by 
 their right names will, as a rule, use the word acquaintance 
 instead of friend. 
 
 Got. Do not say " I have got" when you mean merely 
 
 that you have possession of something. Got means to obtain 
 
 when one strives for anything ; as, " He got the book offered 
 
 as a prize through his earnest efforts." 
 
 12 
 
178 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Good, Great. Good is often improperly used for great. 
 Good means having admirable moral or spiritual qualities ; 
 righteous, virtuous, religious ; great means unusually large 
 mass or magnitude ; big ; vast ; containing many units. 
 The use of good instead of great is clearly improper in the 
 following sentences : " I have a good many sheep." " A 
 good number were present." " She has a good number of 
 bad boys." 
 
 Hurry, Haste. Haste denotes rapidity of motion, merely. 
 Hurry implies confusion as well as rapidity. A person may 
 hasten a work without affecting its accuracy or elegance ; 
 but to hurry carries with it an idea of confusion, laxity of 
 execution, and resulting inelegance. 
 
 How should never be used to ask for the repetition of a 
 word or a sentence. 
 
 Had, Have. A vulgarism of the worst description. 
 These two auxiliary verbs should never be used together. 
 " Had I have known it," " Had you have seen it," instead of 
 " Had I known it." " Had you seen it." 
 
 Hain't. A common and inexcusable vulgarism. 
 
 Had ought. " He had ought to go." Omit the had. 
 Ought says all that had ought says. 
 
 Healthy, Wholesome. Healthy means having health ; 
 wholesome means tending to promote health. Say " Onions 
 are wholesome vegetables," not healthy vegetables. A man 
 maybe healthy; the food he eats, if not deleterious, is 
 wholesome. 
 
 How, That. " I have heard how in Italy one is beset on 
 all sides by beggars ;" read heard that. How means the 
 
FAULTY DICTION. 179 
 
 manner in which. How should never be used instead of the 
 substantive-conjunction that. 
 
 In, Into. Often misused. In denotes position, state ; 
 into, tendency, direction ; as, " I threw the stone into the 
 water, and it lies in the water." " Come into [not in] the 
 house. 11 Where no object is expressed, we may use in; as, 
 11 Come tii." " Go m." 
 
 If. " I doubt if this will every reach you. 11 Say, whether 
 this will ever reach you. 
 
 Ill, Sick. Both words refer to disordered physical con- 
 dition. Sick, however, is the stronger word, and generally 
 the better word to use. 
 
 In so far as. "A want of opportunity would suffice, in 
 so far as the want could be shown.' 1 The in is not needed. 
 
 Like, As. Do not say, " He thinks like I do, 11 but as I do. 
 
 Lend, Loan. Lend is a verb ; loan, a noun. " He en- 
 deavored to secure a loan." " They are said to lend money. " 
 
 Less, Fewer. The following sentence, from a prominent 
 school journal, contains a very common, but inexcusable 
 blunder; "There were not less than three hundred and 
 fifty teachers in attendance. 11 This should be " not fewer. 11 
 Less is used in speaking of quantity ; as, " There was less 
 wheat in the second than in the first bin. 11 Fewer is used of 
 number; as, "Not fewer than sixty thousand people visited 
 the city during the celebration of our great victories. 11 
 
 Love, Like. Love should never be used for like. Both 
 words express a fondness for and a pleasure in something, 
 but love expresses something more — a spirit of devotion to, 
 
180 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 a readiness to sacrifice to obtain, or to serve, what we love. 
 " He loves his country, his mother, and his wife." " He 
 likes peaches and pumpkin pie. 1 ' 
 
 Lay, Lie. Lay is a transitive verb ; lie, intransitive. Lay 
 means " to put down ;" lie means to rest. Lie, being in- 
 transitive, never has an object. The presence or absence of 
 an object, and the character of the verb as transitive or in- 
 transitive may be decided by asking the question, " Lay (or 
 laid) what?" " We say a man lays brick." " A ship lies at 
 anchor." " I must lie down." " I must lay myself down." 
 In short, lay always expresses transitive action, and lie, rest. 
 
 Learn, Teach. To learn is to take instruction ; to teach 
 is to give instruction. " The ladies at the college learned 
 many poor girls to make their own clothing." Read, taught 
 the poor girls ; the girls learned. The uncultured often 
 misuse learn for teach. 
 
 Looks beautifully. The adjective beautiful should be 
 used. " Looks beautifully" is genteel bad grammar. We 
 can say she looks sweet, or beautiful, or charming. That is, 
 to the observer her appearance is sweet or beautiful or 
 charming. 
 
 Mutual. Mutual is properly used in the sense of recipro- 
 cal; hence it is an error to speak of a " mutual friend." Say 
 common friend. Two authors may have a mutual admi- 
 ration for each other, but a society of literary men would 
 have a common admiration for one another. 
 
 Merely, Simply. Merely implies no addition ; simply, 
 no complication ; as, " The boys were there merely as spec- 
 tators ; it is simply incredible that they should have disgraced 
 themselves so." 
 
FAULTY DICTION. 181 
 
 Mere. This word is frequently misused ; " It is true of 
 men as of God, that words merely meet with no response." 
 The writer meant that mere words met with no response. 
 
 Make up their mind. Some people never decide, or con- 
 clude, to do anything ; they "make up their mind" 
 
 Neglect, Negligence . Neglect refers to an act or a suc- 
 cession of acts ; negligence refers to the act or habit of neg- 
 lecting that which ought to be done. 
 
 Nice. This has been aptly termed the social adjective. 
 It is used by some to express every qualification imaginable, 
 as a nice day, a nice time, a nice man. The proper meaning 
 is delicate, exact ; as, a nice distinction in words. 
 
 Nicely. " How do you do ?" " Nicely" " How are 
 you ?" " Nicely." This use of the word is the quintessence 
 of popinjay vulgarity. 
 
 No use. " It was no use to argue with him." Say, of no use. 
 
 Neither, Nor. Neither is often misused by writers of 
 ability ; as, " He would neither give wine, nor oil, nor money." 
 The conjunction should be placed before the excluded ob- 
 jects ; as, " He would give neither wine, nor oil, nor money." 
 " She can neither help her beauty, nor her courage, nor her 
 cruelty." Say, she can help neither, etc. 
 
 Not. Care should be used in placing not. The correla- 
 tive of not when it stands in the first member of a sentence 
 is nor or neither ; as, "Not for thy ivory nor thy gold will I 
 unbind thy chain," — not, or thy gold. " I will not do it, 
 neither shall you," — not, or shall you. 
 
 Off of. One of these words is superfluous. " Give me a 
 yard off of this piece of cloth. Say, give me a yard off this 
 
182 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 piece of cloth, or of this piece of cloth. " The peach fell 
 off of the tree ;" read, fell o^fthe tree. 
 
 Often. Often, oftener, oftenest, the proper comparison. 
 The regular comparison is certainly more euphonious than 
 more often and most often. 
 
 On to. Omit the to. We get on a chair, on a stump, and 
 not on to a chair, a stump, etc. 
 
 Ought, Should. Each of these words implies obligation. 
 Ought is the stronger term. What we ought to do we are 
 morally bound to do. We ought to love our neighbors 
 as we love ourselves, and should be respectful to every one. 
 
 Other. This word is often omitted when its use would 
 make clearer the meaning intended. Other means different 
 from the one specified, not the same. " No man can do as 
 well." This expression includes the person to whom refer- 
 ence is made. " No other man can do as well," is meant. 
 
 Only. The qualifying word only has its place strictly as- 
 signed by the laws of expression, and this place is easily 
 found on analyzing the sentence in which the word occurs ; 
 yet notwithstanding this simple test of its proper place no 
 other word in the English language is more frequently mis- 
 placed. According to the position of only, the same words 
 may be made to express very different meanings ; as, " The 
 drama, upon which the curtain had only fallen a short time 
 since, was ' Money. 1 " Here only is misplaced, for the au- 
 thor meant to say, had fallen only a short time. Placed 
 before fallen it modifies that word contrary to the writer's 
 intention. " In its pages, papers of sterling merit only will 
 appear ;" read only papers of sterling merit. " Things are 
 getting dull down in Texas ; they only shot three men down 
 
FAULTY DICTION. 183 
 
 there last week ;" read, they shot only three men, etc. " I 
 only have three tickets ;" read, only three tickets. Place 
 only immediately before the word or words you mean to 
 qualify. The beauty and strength and clearness of a sen- 
 tence depend quite as much on a proper arrangement of the 
 grammatical terms as on the choice of words used to express 
 the thought. Grammars, rhetorics, examples of faulty dic- 
 tion, and suggestions from the ablest critics can only assist 
 the pupil in his struggle to dislodge the incorrect and ver- 
 bose habits of expression acquired in the home and firmly 
 established by long usage. " Of all the faults to be found 
 in writing, misplaced words," says Cobbett, " is the most 
 common, and perhaps it leads to the greatest number of 
 mistakes. All the words may be the proper words to be 
 used upon the occasion, and yet, by a misplacing of a part of 
 them, the meaning may be wholly destroyed ; and even 
 made to be the contrary of what it ought to be. 1 ' Thinking, 
 vigorous, courageous thinking and revision are the only re- 
 liable remedies for the cure of verbosity and the use of 
 incorrect expressions. 
 
 Only too willing. This phrase is supplanting the simple 
 word willing. " I should like well," or " It would please 
 me," is preferable. 
 
 Proven. This is an incorrect form — a Scotticism — for 
 proved, the perfect participle of prove. Say, " The proposi- 
 tion was proved by John," not " was proven." 
 
 Propose, Purpose. Propose means to offer for consider- 
 ation, as plans, and so forth. Purpose means to intend, to 
 design ; as, u I purpose to write a history of England from 
 the accession of King James the Second down to a time 
 within the memory of living men." — Macaulay. 
 
184 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Plead. This is an erroneous form for pleaded. " He 
 pleaded to be allowed to go," not " he plead." 
 
 Per. This is a Latin preposition, and should always be 
 followed by the Latin word ; as per diem, per annum, not 
 per day or per year. 
 
 Portion, Part. These words are not interchangeable. 
 " A large portion of the building was destroyed by fire" is 
 incorrect, because a portion means a part set aside for some 
 special purpose, or for consideration by itself. 
 
 Party, Person. Party is often misused. Party means 
 any one of two or more bodies of people contending for an- 
 tagonistic opinions or politics ; a number of persons assem- 
 bled for social entertainment. Person means a human being, 
 an individual. 
 
 Procure, Secure. Procure means to come into possession 
 or enjoyment of by some effort or means. Seeure means to 
 make secure against risk or loss ; to fasten, or confine as 
 against escape or loss. We procure meal tickets at some 
 hotels, but secure ourselves against loss by fire by insurance. 
 
 Proof, Evidence. Proof means the establishment of a 
 fact by evidence ; evidence makes clear or plain. The word 
 proof is often misused for evidence; as, " What proof have 
 you to offer in the case ?" " What evidence have you to offer 
 in proof of the truth of your statements ?" 
 
 Procure, Get. Procure is often misused forget by persons 
 who strive to be fine; as, "Where did you procure it?" 
 Better, "Where did you get it?" 
 
 Promise, Assure. Promise is sometimes misused for 
 assure; as, "I promise you I was very much astonished;" 
 
FAULTY DICTION. 185 
 
 read, I assure you, etc. Promise means to engage to do or 
 not to do ; assure means to give confidence to, to convince. 
 
 Partly, Partially. Partly, meaning in part, is preferable 
 to 'partially, since the latter also means with partiality. 
 
 Present, Introduce. By those who are always striving 
 to " show off" the word present is frequently used for intro- 
 duce. Present means to face in the presence of an emperor ; 
 introduce means to bring to be acquainted. A person is 
 presented at court or to our President ; but persons who are 
 unknown to each other are introduced. 
 
 Quantity, Number. Quantity is often improperly used 
 for number. Quantity means so much ; number, a collection 
 of units. We use quantity in speaking of what is measured, 
 or weighed ; number, of what is counted. 
 
 Quite. This word is correctly used only in the sense of 
 entire, complete, finished. A school may have quite a 
 thousand pupils, that is, a complete or full thousand, and 
 still be not quite, or entirely, full. Such expressions as " we 
 had quite a nice time," " she is quite an important person," 
 are gross vulgarisms. 
 
 Rarely or ever. Say, rarely if ever. 
 
 Raise, Increase. Raise is frequently used for increase; 
 as, "A landlord notified his tenant that he would raise his 
 rent." The tenant's reply was, " I thank you, I find it very 
 hard to raise it myself." The landlord should have said, 
 " I will increase your rent." 
 
 Such, So. " I never before saw such a large steeple." 
 By transposing the words the sentence reads, "I never 
 before saw a steeple such large." The proper word to use 
 is so. " I never saw so large a steeple." 
 
186 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Sure. " I'm going sure." Say, " I'm surely going. 
 
 17 
 
 Since, Ago. Since refers to recent time ; ago to past 
 time in general ; as, " I brought you word an hour since." 
 " The Spanish Armada was destroyed off the coast of Eng- 
 land long ago." 
 
 Stay, Stop. We go to a hotel and stay, not stop, there. 
 Stop refers merely to the cessation of motion ; stay means 
 to sojourn, to continue in one place. 
 
 Set, Sit. In strict usage, sit is always intransitive when 
 referring to posture ; set, transitive ; the expressions " a set- 
 ting hen," for " a sitting hen," and " the coat sets well," or 
 ill, as the case may be, for " the coat fits," are colloquialisms 
 common to the United States, where it is by many thought 
 pedantic to use sit in these senses. Garments sit, hens sit, 
 and the wind sits, not sets, in a certain quarter ; e.g., " And 
 look how well my garments sit upon me, much feater [more 
 neatly] than before." — Shakespeare. " Now sits the wind 
 fair, and we will aboard."— Ibid. In Matthew xxi. 4-7, we 
 learn it was prophesied that Jesus should come " sitting upon 
 an ass," so the disciples fetched a colt from the " village 
 over against them," and " they set him thereon." Also see 
 Jeremiah xvii. 11: "As the partridge sitteth on eggs and 
 hatcheth them not." 
 
 Shall, Will. Shall, in an affirmative sentence in the first 
 person, and will, in the second and third persons, merely 
 announce future action. " I shall go to town to-morrow." 
 u I shall not ; I shall wait for better weather." " We shall 
 be glad to see you." " We shall set out early, and shall try 
 to arrive by noon." 
 
FAULTY DICTION. 187 
 
 Shall, in an affirmative sentence in the second and third 
 persons, announces the speaker's intention to control. Thus, 
 " You shall hear me out." " You shall go, sick or well." 
 " He shall be my heir. 1 ' 
 
 Will, in the first person, expresses a promise, announces 
 the speaker's intention to control, proclaims a determination. 
 Thus, " I will [I promise to] assist you.' 1 " I will [I am de- 
 termined to] have my right." " We will [We promise to] 
 come to you in the morning." — The Verbalist. 
 
 Scarcely, Hardly. Scarcely pertains to quantity ; hardly 
 to degree ; as, " There is scarcely a bushel of wheat." " I 
 shall hardly finish my job by nightfall." 
 
 Seldom or ever is incorrect ; better, seldom if ever, or 
 seldom or never. 
 
 Superfluous Words. A careful study of the following 
 paragraph, taken from " The Verbalist," will prove helpful to 
 pupils : " Whenever I try to write well, I always find I can 
 do it." "I shall have finished by the latter end of this week." 
 " Iron sinks down in water." " He combined together all the 
 facts." " My brother called on me, and we both took a walk." 
 " I can do it equally as well as he." " We could not forbear 
 from doing it." " Before I go, I must first be paid." " We 
 were compelled to return back." " We forced them to re- 
 treat back fully a mile." " His conduct was approved of by 
 everybody." "They conversed together for a long time." 
 " The balloon rose up very rapidly." " Give me another 
 one." " Come home as soon as ever you can." " Who finds 
 him in money ?" " He came in last of all." " He has got 
 all he can carry." "What have you gotf "No matter; 
 I have got." " I have got the headache." " Have you got 
 
188 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 any brothers ?" " No ; but I have got a sister." All the 
 words in italics are superfluous. 
 
 Think, Believe. Think is often improperly used for 
 believe. To think means to form by mental processes, to 
 review in mind ; to believe means to accept as true on tes- 
 timony or authority. " I think well of your proposition." 
 " I believe that George Washington was a great and good 
 man ;" that is, I accept as true the history of his life. 
 
 Take on. This group of words is often misused for 
 grieve or scold. 
 
 Take up school. This phrase is often misused for begin 
 school. " School took up at nine o'clock." Say, school began 
 at nine o'clock. 
 
 They, their, them. Each of these words is often misused 
 in such expressions as, " If any one has lost a book, they may 
 inquire for it." " Every one must get their own lesson." 
 Say, his or her lesson. " Them examples are not difficult." 
 Say, these or those examples. 
 
 This, that or these, those. In the sense of former and 
 latter, this and these should refer to the latter of the two 
 things mentioned ; that, those to the former. 
 
 That of. " He chose for a profession that of the law." 
 Why not say, " He chose law for a profession." 
 
 Try, Make. Try is often misused for make ; as, " Try the 
 experiment," for "Make the experiment." 
 
 Tantalize means to tease by repeated disappointments. 
 Aggravate should never be used for irritate, provoke, or 
 tantalize. 
 
FAULTY DICTION. 189 
 
 Taste of. The of is superfluous. We taste or smell a 
 thing, not taste of nor smell of. 
 
 Transpire, Happen. Transpire is frequently misused for 
 happen. Transpire means, literally, to ooze out ; as, " Trans- 
 piration is a slow flow under resistance." Happen means 
 to come, occur, or exist by chance. " What happened at 
 the meeting of the commissioners has not yet transpired." 
 
 Upon, on. The prevailing tendency is towards the use of 
 the simpler on, unless the idea to be expressed is that of 
 actual superposition ; as, " The mason places one stone upon 
 another." We call on a friend, make speeches on subjects, 
 write on various questions, and, if we are not careful in our 
 choice of prepositions, find that " one woe doth tread upon 
 another's heels, so fast they follow." — Shakespeare. 
 
 Whole of. An expression that should not be used in- 
 stead of whole, entire, before a plural noun. " The whole of 
 the congregation were greatly affected" should be "the 
 whole [better, entire'] congregation," etc. Again, " The whole 
 of the committee have left" should be " all the committee," 
 unless it is desired to make reference only to such of the 
 members as are whole in body, or not wanting in the full 
 number of limbs. 
 
 "With, By. With denotes the instrument ; by the agent ; 
 as, "The ditch was dug by the gardener with a spade." 
 
 What, That. What is often improperly used for that; 
 as, " He would not believe but what I did it ;" read, but that. 
 " I do not doubt but what I shall go to St. Louis to-morrow ;" 
 read, doubt that. 
 
EXERCISE XXIII. 
 
 Selections for Study. 
 
 I. To a Waterfowl. 
 
 1. Whither, 'midst falling dew, 
 
 While glow the heavens with the last steps of day, 
 Far, through their rosy depths, dost thou pursue 
 Thy solitary way ! 
 
 2. Vainly the fowler's eye 
 
 Might mark thy distant flight to do thee wrong, 
 As, darkly painted on the crimson sky, 
 Thy figure floats along. 
 
 3. Seek'st thou the plashy brink 
 
 Of weedy lake, or marge of river wide, 
 Or where the rocking billows rise and sink 
 On the chafed ocean-side ? 
 
 4. There is a Power whose care 
 
 Teaches thy way along that pathless coast, — 
 The desert and illimitable air, — 
 Lone wandering, but not lost. 
 
 5. All day thy wings have fanned, 
 
 At that far height, the cold, thin atmosphere ; 
 Yet stoop not, weary, to the welcome land, 
 Thousrh the dark night is near. 
 
 >r- ■ 
 
 6. And soon that toil shall end : 
 
 Soon shalt thou find a summer home, and rest 
 And scream among thy fellows : reeds shall bend 
 
 Soon o'er thy shelter' d nest. 
 190 
 
SELECTIONS FOR STUDY. 191 
 
 7. Thou'rt gone ! the abyss of heaven 
 
 Hath swallow' d up thy form ; yet, on my heart 
 Deeply hath sunk the lesson thou hast given, 
 And shall not soon depart : 
 
 8. He who, from zone to zone, 
 
 Guides through the boundless sky thy certain flight 
 
 In the long way that I must tread alone, 
 
 Will lead my steps aright. 
 
 — William Cullen Bryant. 
 
 Analysis. 
 
 NOTE. — The outlines here presented are merely 
 suggestive. Pupils should be encouraged to dis- 
 cuss the thoughts of the authors and to note 
 carefully the forms in which the thoughts are ex- 
 pressed ; they should ever bear in mind that gram- 
 matical analysis is only a means to an end. Formal 
 grammatical analysis should be accompanied by 
 thought analysis and composition. Language is a 
 growth, and, like every other growth, is primarily 
 dependent upon an inward vital energy. It has its 
 origin and its development in answer to an instinc- 
 tive desire of the soul to express its thoughts and 
 feelings. It must be understood that grammar does 
 not make laws for language. It merely states the 
 facts in regard to the right use of language, and in 
 an orderly way, so that they can be easily referred 
 to and learned. Rules 'of syntax only report what is 
 regarded as good English. Incorrect forms of ex- 
 pression are dislodged only by using correct forms. 
 Thinking is the only cure for faulty English. 
 
 First Stanza. — What kind of a sentence is this stanza ? 
 What is meant by principal proposition f What is meant 
 by subordinate proposition f Construe 'midst falling dew. 
 What part of speech is While glow the heavens ivith the last 
 steps of day f Parse Far, Thy. Why say solitary way f 
 
192 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Second Stanza. — What kind of a sentence is this 
 stanza ? Analyze it. What is meant by fowlers eye f 
 Parse Might mark. Parse the object of Might mark. Con- 
 strue to do thee wrong. Construe the last two lines. Parse 
 As. Construe darkly painted on the crimson sky. 
 
 Third Stanza. — What kind of a sentence is this stanza ? 
 Name the objects of SeeFst. Why say weedy lake, marge 
 of river wide f Where do rocking billoivs rise and sink f 
 What is meant by chafed ocean-side f Define chafed and 
 use it in a sentence. 
 
 Fourth Stanza. — What kind of a sentence is this 
 stanza ? Parse There, the first word. Why do we use a 
 capital in writing Power f Construe the clause beginning 
 with whose. What is meant by pathless coast f Construe 
 the third line. Define illimitable. Construe the last line. 
 
 Fifth Stanza. — Parse have fanned, day, stoop. Parse 
 Yet, weary. Construe to the welcome land. Why say wel- 
 come land f Parse Though, is, near. 
 
 Sixth Stanza. — What toil ? Parse shall end, shalt find, 
 scream. Compare Soon. Why say sheltered nest ? 
 
 Seventh Stanza. — What kind of a sentence is Thou\t 
 gone I Analyze the second sentence. Define abyss. 
 Parse yet. Parse hath sunk. Parse lesson. What lesson f 
 Construe thou hast given. 
 
 Eighth Stanza. — What kind of a sentence is this stanza? 
 Read aloud the principal proposition. Read the first de- 
 pendent proposition ; the second. Construe from zone, to 
 zone. Define zone. Construe In the long way. What is 
 meant by In the long way f Why is the relative that used, 
 in the third line ? Parse aright. 
 
SELECTIONS FOR STUDY. 193 
 
 II. The Sense of Beauty. 
 
 1. Beauty is an all-pervading presence. It unfolds in the num- 
 berless flowers of the spring. It waves in the branches of the trees 
 and the green blades of grass. It haunts the depths of the earth and 
 sea, and gleams out in the hues of the shell and the precious stone. 
 
 2. And not only these minute objects, but the ocean, the moun- 
 tains, the clouds, the heavens, the stars, the rising and setting sun, 
 all overflow with beauty. The universe is its temple ; and those men 
 who are alive to it cannot lift their eyes without feeling themselves 
 encompassed with it on every side. 
 
 3. Now, this beauty is so precious, the enjoyments it gives are so 
 refined and pure, so congenial with our tenderest and noblest feelings, 
 and so akin to worship, that it is painful to think of the multitude of 
 men as living in the midst of it, and living almost as blind to it, as 
 if, instead of this fair earth and glorious sky, they were tenants of a 
 dungeon. An infinite joy is lost to the world by the want of culture 
 of this spiritual endowment. 
 
 4. Suppose that I were to visit a cottage, and to see its walls lined 
 with the choicest pictures of Raphael, and every spare nook filled 
 with statues of the most exquisite workmanship, and that I were to 
 learn that neither man, woman, nor child ever cast an eye at these 
 miracles of art, how should I feel their privation ; how should I want 
 to open their eyes, and to help them to comprehend and feel the 
 loveliness and grandeur which in vain courted their notice ! 
 
 5. But every husbandman is living in sight of the works of a divine 
 Artist ; and how much would his existence be elevated, could he see 
 the glory which shines forth in their forms, hues, proportions, and 
 moral expression ! I have spoken only of the beauty of nature, but 
 how much of this mysterious charm is found in the elegant arts, and 
 especially in literature ? 
 
 6. The best books have most beauty. The greatest truths are 
 wronged if not linked with beauty, and they win their way most 
 surely and deeply into the soul when arrayed in this their natural and 
 fit attire. 
 
 7. Now, no man receives the true culture of a man, in whom the 
 
 13 
 
194 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 sensibility to the beautiful is not cherished ; and I know of no con- 
 dition in life from which it should be excluded. Of all luxuries this 
 is the cheapest and most at hand ; and it seems to me to be most 
 important to those conditions, where coarse labor tends to give a 
 grossness to the mind. 
 
 8. From the diffusion of the sense of beauty in ancient Greece, 
 and of the taste for music in modern Germany, we learn that the 
 people at large may partake of refined gratifications, which have 
 hitherto been thought to be necessarily restricted to a few. — William 
 Ellery Charming. 
 
 Analysis. 
 
 First Paragraph. — What is meant by an all pervading 
 presence f Parse presence. What part of speech is the 
 phrase in the numberless flowers of spring f What is the 
 antecedent of It, in the sentences which follow presence? 
 Parse out. Construe in the hues of the shell and precious 
 stone. Define and compare precious. 
 
 Second Paragraph. — Analyze the first sentence. What 
 is meant by minute objects t In what sense do the greatest 
 objects overflow with beauty? Parse all. What is meant 
 by The universe is its temple f What is meant by who are 
 alive to it f Construe with it, on every side. 
 
 Third Paragraph. — Parse Now. Use now as another 
 part of speech. Parse so, in so precious. Construe with 
 our tenderest and noblest feelings. Compare tender, noble. 
 What does it represent, in the third line ? What is the logical 
 subject of is painful f Parse as if. Parse tenants. Con- 
 strue to the world by the want of culture of this spiritual 
 endowment. Define spiritual, endowment, infinite. 
 
 Fourth Paragraph. — What is the object of Suppose f of 
 to see f Construe lined with the choicest pictures of Raphael; 
 
SELECTIONS FOR STUDY. 195 
 
 also filled with statues of the most exquisite workmanship. 
 What is the object of to learn f Analyze the sentence be- 
 ginning with hoiv. Construe which in vain courted their 
 notice ! Define courted and use it in a simple sentence. 
 
 Fifth Paragraph. — Define husbandman. Parse is living. 
 What is meant by divine Artist f Name some of the visible 
 works of the divine Artist. Parse would be elevated, in the 
 second line. Construe which shines forth in their forms, 
 hues, proportions, and moral expression ! What is meant by 
 moral expression? What is meant by mysterious charm in 
 the elegant arts f in literature ? 
 
 Sixth Paragraph. — Name three books that have great 
 beauty. Parse have, in the first sentence. What kind of a 
 verb is it as here used ? Use it as an auxiliary verb. Parse 
 are wronged. Construe the last clause. What two distinct 
 offices does the word when fill in this sentence ? Construe 
 if not linked with beauty. Why is truth wronged, if not 
 linked with beauty ? Parse arrayed. Parse this. Construe 
 their natural and fit attire. 
 
 Seventh Paragraph. — Analyze the first sentence. Parse 
 whom. Parse is cherished. Parse ivhich, in the third line. 
 Analyze the sentence beginning with Of. Construe where 
 coarse labor tends to give a grossness to the mind. What is 
 meant by coarse labor ? Define grossness. 
 
 Eighth Paragraph. — Define diffusion and use it in a simple 
 sentence. Locate Greece. Locate Germany. Analyze the 
 paragraph. Parse learn, in the second line. Name the 
 object of learn. Construe the last clause. Parse which. 
 Parse have been thought. What may we learn from the 
 educated masses in Greece and Germany ? 
 
196 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 III. The Closing Year. 
 
 1. Tis midnight's holy hour — and silence now 
 Is brooding, like a gentle spirit, o'er 
 
 The still and pulseless world. Hark ! on the winds 
 
 The bell's deep tones are swelling — 'tis the knell 
 
 Of the departed year. No funeral train 
 
 Is sweeping past ; yet, on the stream and wood, 
 
 With melancholy light, the moonbeams rest 
 
 Like a pale, spotless shroud ; the air is stirred 
 
 As by a mourner's sigh ; and on yon cloud, 
 
 That floats so still and placidly through heaven, 
 
 The spirits of the seasons seem to stand, — 
 
 Young Spring, bright Summer, Autumn's solemn form, 
 
 And Winter with his aged locks, — and breathe, 
 
 In mournful cadences, that come abroad 
 
 Like the far wind-harp's wild and touching wail, 
 
 A melancholy dirge o'er the dead year, 
 
 Gone from the earth forever. 
 
 2. 'Tis a time 
 For memory and for tears. Within the deep, 
 Still chambers of the heart, a spectre dim, 
 Whose tones are like the wizard voice of Time, 
 Heard from the tomb of ages, points its cold 
 And solemn finger to the beautiful 
 
 And holy visions that have passed away, 
 
 And left no shadow of their loveliness 
 
 On the dead waste of life. That spectre lifts 
 
 The coffin-lid of Hope, and Joy, and Love, 
 
 And, bending mournfully above the pale, 
 
 Sweet forms that slumber there, scatters dead flowers 
 
 O'er what has passed to nothingness. 
 
 3. The year 
 Has gone, and with it, many a glorious throng 
 Of happy dreams. Its mark is on each brow, 
 Its shadow in each heart. In its swift course, 
 
SELECTIONS FOR STUDY. 197 
 
 It waved its sceptre o'er the beautiful — 
 And they are not. It laid its pallid hand 
 Upon the strong man — and the haughty form 
 Is fallen, and the flashing eye is dim. 
 It trod the hall of revelry, where thronged 
 The bright and joyous — and the tearful wail 
 Of stricken ones is heard, where erst the song 
 And reckless shout resounded. 
 
 4. It passed o'er 
 
 The battle-plain, where sword, and spear, and shield, 
 Flashed in the light of mid-day, — and the strength 
 Of serried hosts is shivered, and the grass, 
 Green from the soil of carnage, waves above 
 The crushed and mouldering skeleton. It came, 
 And faded like a wreath of mist at eve ; 
 Yet, ere it melted in the viewless air, 
 It heralded its millions to their home 
 In the dim land of dreams. 
 
 5. Remorseless Time ! 
 Fierce spirit of the glass and scythe ! — what power 
 Can stay him in his silent course, or melt 
 
 His iron heart to pity ? On, still on 
 
 He presses, and forever. The proud bird, 
 
 The condor of the Andes, that can soar 
 
 Through heaven's unfathomable depths, or brave 
 
 The fury of the northern hurricane, 
 
 And bathe his plumage in the thunder's home, 
 
 Folds his broad wings at nightfall, and sinks down 
 
 To rest upon his mountain crag, — but Time 
 
 Knows not the weight of sleep or weariness, 
 
 And night's deep darkness has no chain to bind 
 
 His rushing pinions. 
 
 6. Revolutions sweep 
 O'er earth, like troubled visions o'er the breast 
 Of dreaming sorrow ; cities rise and sink, 
 
198 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Like bubbles on the water ; fiery isles 
 
 Spring blazing from the ocean, and go back 
 
 To their mysterious caverns ; mountains rear 
 
 To heaven their bald and blackened cliffs, and bow 
 
 Their tall heads to the plain ; new empires rise, 
 
 Gathering the strength of hoary centuries, 
 
 And rush down like the Alpine avalanche, 
 
 Startling the nations, — and the very stars, 
 
 Yon bright and burning blazonry of God, 
 
 Glitter a while in their eternal depths, 
 
 And, like the Pleiad, loveliest of their train, 
 
 Shoot from their glorious spheres, and pass away, 
 
 To darkle in the trackless void : yet Time — 
 
 Time, the tomb-builder, holds his fierce career, 
 
 Dark, stern, all-pitiless, and pauses not 
 
 Amid the mighty wrecks that strew his path, 
 
 To sit and muse, like other conquerors, 
 
 Upon the fearful ruin he has wrought. 
 
 — George D. Prentice. 
 
 Analysis. 
 
 First Stanza. — Why holy hour ? What kind of a sentence 
 is the first sentence ? Name the phrases in the first sen- 
 tence. Why still and pulseless world f Parse Hark ! What 
 is the antecedent of ' Tis f What kind of a verb-phrase is are 
 swelling f What part of speech is Of the departed year f 
 Parse past. Parse yet. Name the phrases that modify rest. 
 What kind of a clause is That floats so still and placidly through 
 heaven f Why is the clause introduced by that f Why say 
 Young Spring, bright Summer, Autumn's solemn form, and 
 Winter with his aged locks f What is the grammatical subject 
 of breathe f Give the principal parts of breathe. Breathe 
 what ? What part of speech is Like the far wind-harp's wild 
 and touching wail? What does Gone from the earth forever 
 
SELECTIONS FOR STUDY. 199 
 
 modify ? As a whole, how is it used ? What part of speech 
 is from the earth forever ? Give the principal parts of Go. 
 
 Second Stanza. — Why say, 'Tis a time for memory and 
 for tears f What part of speech is Within the deep, still 
 chambers of the heart f Name the principal elements of the 
 second sentence. What is meant by a spectre dim f What 
 visions f What kind of a clause is that have passed away, 
 etc. ? Is the clause restrictive or coordinate ? Why are 
 Hope and Joy and Love capitalized? Construe bending 
 mournfully above the pale, sweet forms. Parse what, in the 
 last line. Parse has passed. 
 
 Third Stanza. — Parse has gone, of happy dreams. What 
 is meant in the second sentence ? What is meant by the 
 phrase, o\r the beautiful? What part of speech is the 
 phrase? Why say pallid hand f Parse is fallen. Parse is 
 dim. Construe where thronged the bright and joyous. Parse 
 is heard. Construe where erst the song and 7-eckless shout 
 resounded. Why reckless shout f 
 
 Fourth Stanza. — It passed. What passed? Construe 
 where sword, and spear, and shield, flashed in the light of mid- 
 day. Parse is shivered, crushed, mouldering. Parse yet, ere, 
 in the viewless air. Why say viewless air ? Construe In the 
 dim land of dreams. 
 
 Fifth Stanza. — Parse Time. Construe Fierce spirit of the 
 glass and scythe ! Why use him, in the third line ? Construe 
 The condor of the Andes. Name the principal elements of 
 the sentence following forever, in the fifth line. Why is that 
 used, in the sixth line ? What kind of phrase is To rest upon 
 his mountain crag f Parse or, in the third line from the last. 
 What part of speech is to bind his rushing pinions ? Parse 
 rushing. Define pinions. 
 
200 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Sixth Stanza. — How do revolutions sweep o'er earth? 
 What kind of a phrase is like troubled visions o'er the breast 
 of dreaming sorrow ? Is it a simple, complex, or compound 
 phrase ? Is it used as an adjective or as an adverb ? How 
 do cities rise and sink ? Construe blazing from the ocean. 
 Construe from the ocean. Construe To their mysterious cav- 
 erns. Why say mysterious caverns f Construe To heaven their 
 bald and blackened cliffs. Construe Gathering the strength of 
 hoary centuries. Parse Startling. Construe Yon bright and 
 burning blazonry of God. Construe loveliest of their train. 
 Construe the tomb-builder. Parse dark, stern, amid the 
 mighty wrecks. What wrecks ? Construe To sit and muse. 
 What is meant by like other conquerors ? What ruin ? What 
 does the clause he has wrought limit ? 
 
 IV. Proper Distribution of Time. 
 
 1. Time we ought to consider as a sacred trust, committed to us by 
 God ; of which we are now the depositaries, and are to render an 
 account at the last. That portion of it which he has allotted to us is 
 intended partly for the concerns of this world, partly for those of the 
 next. Let each of these occupy, in the distribution of our time, that 
 space which properly belongs to it. 
 
 2. Let not the hours of hospitality and pleasure interfere with the 
 discharge of our necessary affairs ; and let not what we call necessary 
 affairs encroach upon the time which is due to devotion. To every- 
 thing there is a season, and a time for every purpose under heaven. 
 If we delay till to-morrow what ought to be done to-day, we over- 
 charge the morrow with a burden which belongs not to it. We load 
 the wheels of time, and prevent them from carrying us along smoothly. 
 
 3. He who every morning plans the transactions of the day, and 
 follows out that plan, carries on a thread which will guide him 
 through a labyrinth of the most busy life. The orderly arrangement 
 of his time is like a ray of light, which darts itself through all his 
 affairs. But where no plan is laid, where the disposal of time is 
 
SELECTIONS FOR STUDY. 201 
 
 surrendered merely to the chance of incidents, all things lie huddled 
 together in one chaos, which admits neither of distribution nor review. 
 
 4. The first requisite for introducing order into the management of 
 time, is to be impressed with a just sense of its value. Let us con- 
 sider well how much depends upon it, and how fast it flies away. 
 The bulk of men are in nothing more capricious and inconsistent 
 than in their appreciation of time. When they think of it as the 
 measure of their continuance on earth, they highly prize it, and with 
 the greatest anxiety seek to lengthen it out. 
 
 5. But when they view it in separate parcels, they appear to hold 
 it in contempt, and squander it with inconsiderate confusion. While 
 they complain that life is short, they are often wishing its different 
 periods at an end. Covetous of every other possession, of time only 
 they are prodigal. They allow every idle man to be master of this 
 property, and make every frivolous occupation welcome that can help 
 them to consume it. 
 
 6. Manhood is disgraced by the consequences of neglected youth. 
 Old age, oppressed by cares that belonged to a former period, labors 
 under a burden not his own. At the close of life, the dying man 
 beholds with anguish that his days are finishing, when his preparation 
 for eternity is hardly commenced. Such are the effects of a disor- 
 derly waste of time, through not attending to its value. Everything 
 in the life of such persons is misplaced. Nothing is performed aright, 
 from not being performed in due season. 
 
 7. But he who is orderly in the distribution of his time, takes the 
 proper method of escaping those manifold evils. He is justly said 
 to redeem the time. By proper management he prolongs it. He lives 
 much in a little space ; more in a few years than others do in many. 
 He can live to God and his own soul, and at the same time attend to 
 all the lawful interests of the present world. He looks back on the 
 past and provides for the future. — Hugh Blair. 
 
 Analysis. 
 
 First Paragraph. — In what case is Time, the first word ? 
 Parse ought. Construe committed to us by God. Parse de- 
 
202 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 positaries. What is meant by to render an account at the 
 lastf What part of speech is at the last? Analyze the 
 sentence beginning with That. Construe which he has al- 
 lotted to us. Parse which. Parse Let, in the last sentence. 
 Parse in the distributioyi of our time. What space ? Parse 
 occupy, that, which. 
 
 Second Paragraph. — Analyze the sentence ending with 
 affairs. Parse Let, in the first line ; what in the second line, 
 which, in the third line ; there, in the fourth line. What 
 kind of a phrase is for every purpose under heaven f What 
 part of speech is the phrase ? Parse what, in the next sen- 
 tence. Parse morrow. Parse which, in the same sentence. 
 Construe from carrying us along smoothly. 
 
 Third Paragraph. — Analyze the first sentence. Con- 
 strue which will guide him through the labyrinth of a busy life. 
 As a unit what part of speech is the clause ? What two 
 offices does which perform? Analyze the next sentence. 
 Analyze the sentence beginning with But Parse Bid, hud- 
 dled, is surrendered, to the chance of incidents. 
 
 Fourth Paragraph. — Analyze the first sentence. Parse 
 is. Construe with a just sense of its value. Parse Let, in the 
 second line. Parse consider. Name the complements of are, 
 in the third sentence. Analyze the sentence beginning with 
 When. What kind of a conjunction is When? 
 
 Fifth Paragraph. — Analyze the first sentence. To what 
 does it refer, in this sentence ? Parse While, the first word 
 in the second sentence. Use while as a verb. Construe 
 that life is short. Parse are wishing. Construe Covetous of 
 every other possession. Parse Covetous. Define Covetous. 
 Use it in a sentence. Parse are prodigal. Define prodigal. 
 
SELECTIONS FOR STUDY. 203 
 
 Use it in a sentence. What is meant by every idle man to be 
 master of this property f What property f Construe to con- 
 sume it. 
 
 Sixth Paragraph. — Why is manhood disgraced by indo- 
 lence in youth ? Is condition a growth or a gift ? Analyze 
 the second sentence. What part of speech is the phrase 
 beginning with oppressed f What cares t Construe not his 
 own. Parse are finishing, is commenced, are effects. Analyze 
 the next two sentences. Parse is misplaced. Parse aright. 
 
 Seventh Paragraph. — Analyze the first sentence. Parse 
 who, the third word. Define manifold. In what sense may 
 one prolong time f Parse much, in a little space. Parse or 
 construe than others do in many. Analyze the sentence be- 
 ginning with He can live, etc. Parse back, in the last sen- 
 tence. Parse looks, provides. 
 
 V. Elegy in a Country Church-Yard. 
 
 TO THE TEACHER : Require the class to give the 
 proximate analysis of the following selections by 
 stating: (1) the kind of sentence; (2) the complete 
 subject; (3) the complete predicate; (4) the mean- 
 ing of the sentence in the pupil's own language. 
 
 1. The curfew tolls the knell of parting day, 
 
 The lowing herd winds slowly o'er the lea, 
 The ploughman homeward plods his weary way, 
 And leaves the world to darkness and to me. 
 
 2. Now fades the glimmering landscape on the sight, 
 
 And all the air a solemn stillness holds, 
 Save where the beetle wheels his droning flight, 
 And drowsy tinklings lull the distant folds ; 
 
204 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 3. Save that from yonder ivy-mantled tower 
 
 The moping owl does to the moon complain 
 Of such as, wandering near her secret bower, 
 Molest her ancient solitary reign. 
 
 4. Beneath those rugged elms, that yew-tree's shade, 
 
 Where heaves the turf in many a mouldering heap, 
 Each in his narrow cell forever laid, 
 
 The rude forefathers of the hamlet sleep. 
 
 5. The breezy call of incense-breathing morn, 
 
 The swallow twittering from the straw-built shed, 
 The cock's shrill clarion, or the echoing horn, 
 No more shall rouse them from their lowly bed. 
 
 6. For them no more the blazing hearth shall burn, 
 
 Or busy housewife ply her evening care ; 
 No children run to lisp their sire's return, 
 Or climb his knees, the envied kiss to share. 
 
 7. Oft did the harvest to their sickle yield, 
 
 Their furrow oft the stubborn glebe has broke : 
 How jocund did they drive their team afield ! 
 
 How bowed the woods beneath their sturdy stroke ! 
 
 8. Let not Ambition mock their useful toil, 
 
 Their homely joys, and destiny obscure ; 
 Nor Grandeur hear, with a disdainful smile, 
 The short and simple annals of the poor. 
 
 9. The boast of heraldry, the pomp of power, 
 
 And all that beauty, all that wealth, e'er gave, 
 Await alike th' inevitable hour : 
 
 The paths of glory lead but to the grave. 
 
 10. Nor you, ye proud, impute to these the fault, 
 If Memory o'er their tomb no trophies raise, 
 Where through the long-drawn aisle and fretted vault 
 The pealing anthem swells the note of praise. 
 
SELECTIONS FOR STUDY. 205 
 
 11. Can storied urn, or animated bust, 
 
 Back to its mansion call the fleeting breath ? 
 Can Honor's voice provoke the silent dust, 
 
 Or Flattery soothe the dull, cold ear of death ? 
 
 12. Perhaps in this neglected spot is laid 
 
 Some heart once pregnant with celestial fire ; 
 Hands that the rod of empire might have swayed, 
 Or waked to ecstasy the living lyre : 
 
 13. But Knowledge to their eyes her ample page, 
 
 Rich with the spoils of time, did ne'er unroll ; 
 Chill Penury repressed their noble rage, 
 And froze the genial current of the soul. 
 
 14. Full many a gem, of purest ray serene, 
 
 The dark, unfathomed caves of ocean bear ; 
 Full many a flower is born to blush unseen, 
 And waste its sweetness on the desert air. 
 
 15. Some village Hampden, that with dauntless breast 
 
 The little tyrant of his fields withstood, — 
 Some mute, inglorious Milton, — here may rest ; 
 Some Cromwell, guiltless of his country's blood. 
 
 16. Th' applause of listening senates to command, 
 
 The threats of pain and ruin to despise, 
 To scatter plenty o'er a smiling land, 
 
 And read their history in a nation's eyes, 
 
 17. Their lot forbade : nor circumscribed alone 
 
 Their growing virtues, but their crimes confined ; 
 Forbade to wade through slaughter to a throne, 
 And shut the gates of mercy on mankind ; 
 
 18. The struggling pangs of conscious truth to hide, 
 
 To quench the blushes of ingenuous shame, 
 Or heap the shrine of luxury and pride 
 With incense kindled at the Muse's flame. 
 
206 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 19. Far from the maddening crowd's ignoble strife, 
 
 Their sober wishes never learned to stray ; 
 Along the cool, sequestered vale of life 
 
 They kept the noiseless tenor of their way. 
 
 20. Yet e'en these bones from insult to protect, 
 
 Some frail memorial still erected nigh, 
 With uncouth rhymes and shapeless sculpture decked, 
 Implores the passing tribute of a sigh. 
 
 21. Their name, their years, spelt by th' unlettered Muse, 
 
 The place of fame and elegy supply ; 
 
 And many a holy text around she strews, 
 
 That teach the rustic moralist to die. 
 
 22. For who, to dumb forgetfulness a prey, 
 
 This pleasing, anxious being e'er resigned, 
 Left the warm precincts of the cheerful day, 
 Nor cast one longing, lingering look behind ? 
 
 23. On some fond breast the parting soul relies, 
 
 Some pious drops the closing eye requires ; 
 E'en from the tomb the voice of nature cries, 
 E'en in our ashes live their wonted fires. 
 
 24. For thee, who, mindful of th' unhonored dead, 
 
 Dost in these lines their artless tale relate, 
 If 'chance, by lonely contemplation led, 
 
 Some kindred spirit shall inquire thy fate, — 
 
 25. Haply some hoary-headed swain may say, 
 
 " Oft have we seen him at the peep of dawn, 
 Brushing with hasty steps the dews away, 
 To meet the sun upon the upland lawn. 
 
 26. " There, at the foot of yonder nodding beech, 
 
 That wreathes its old fantastic roots so high, 
 His listless length at noontide would he stretch, 
 And pore upon the brook that babbles by. 
 
SELECTIONS FOR STUDY. 207 
 
 27. " Hard by yon wood, now smiling as in scorn, 
 
 Muttering his wayward fancies, would he rove, 
 Now drooping, woful-wan, like one forlorn, 
 
 Or crazed with care, or crossed in hopeless love. 
 
 28. " One morn I missed him on the customed hill, 
 
 Along the heath, and near his favorite tree : 
 Another came, — nor yet beside the rill, 
 
 Nor up the lawn, nor at the wood, was he : 
 
 29. " The next, with dirges due, in sad array, 
 
 Slow through the churchway path we saw him borne ; 
 Approach and read (for thou canst read) the lay 
 Graved on the stone beneath yon aged thorn." 
 
 THE EPITAPH. 
 
 Here rests his head upon the lap of Earth, 
 A youth to fortune and to fame unknown : 
 
 Fair Science frowned not on his humele birth, 
 And Melancholy marked him for her own. 
 
 Large was his bounty, and his soul sincere. 
 Heaven did a recompense as largely send : 
 
 He gave to misery — all he had — a tear, 
 
 He gained from heaven ('twas all he wished) a friend. 
 
 No further seek his merits to disclose, 
 
 Or draw his frailties from their dread abode, 
 
 (There they alike in trembling hope repose,) 
 The bosom of his Father and his God. 
 
 — Thomas Gray. 
 
 VI. Memory and Hope. 
 
 PART FIRST. 
 
 1. Hope is the leading-string of youth ; memory the staff of age. 
 Yet, for a long time, they were at variance, and scarcely ever associ- 
 ated together. Memory was almost always grave, nay, sad and mel- 
 
208 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 ancholy. She delighted in silence and repose, amid rocks and water- 
 falls ; and whenever she raised her eyes from the ground, it was only 
 to look back over her shoulder. 
 
 2. Hope was a smiling, dancing, rosy boy, with sparkling eyes, 
 and it was impossible to look upon him without being inspired by his 
 gay and sprightly buoyancy. Wherever he went, he diffused glad- 
 ness and joy around him ; the eyes of the young sparkled brighter 
 than ever at his approach ; old age, as it cast its dim glances at the 
 blue vault of heaven, seemed inspired with new vigor ; the flowers 
 looked more gay, the grass more green, the birds sung more cheerily, 
 and all nature seemed to sympathize in his gladness. Memory was 
 of mortal birth, but Hope partook of immortality. 
 
 3. One day they chanced to meet, and Memory reproached Hope 
 with being a deceiver. She charged him with deluding mankind with 
 visionary, impracticable schemes, and exciting expectations that led 
 only to disappointment and regret ; with being the ignis fatuus of 
 youth, and the scourge of old age. 
 
 4. But Hope cast back upon her the charge of deceit, and main- 
 tained that the pictures of the past were as much exaggerated by 
 Memory as were the anticipations of Hope. He declared that she 
 looked at objects at a great distance in the past, he in the future, and 
 that this distance magnified everything. " Let us make the circuit of 
 the world," said he, "and try the experiment." Memory reluc- 
 tantly consented, and they went their way together. 
 
 5. The first person they met was a schoolboy, lounging lazily along, 
 and stopping every moment to gaze around, as if unwilling to pro- 
 ceed on his way. By and by he sat down and burst into tears. 
 "Whither so fast, my good lad?" asked Hope, jeeringly. 
 
 6. "I am going to school," replied the lad, "to study, when I 
 would rather, a thousand times, be at play ; and sit on a bench with 
 a book in my hand, while I long to be sporting in the fields. But 
 never mind, I shall be a man soon, and then I shall be as free as the 
 air." Saying this, he skipped away merrily, in the hope of soon being 
 a man. " It is thus you play upon the inexperience of youth," said 
 Memory, reproachfully. 
 
 7. Passing onward, they met a beautiful girl, pacing slowly and 
 
SELECTIONS FOR STUDY. 209 
 
 with a melancholy air, behind a party of gay young men and maidens, 
 who walked arm in arm with each other, and were flirting and ex- 
 changing all those little harmless courtesies which nature prompts on 
 such occasions. They were all gayly dressed in silks and ribbons ; 
 but the little girl had on a simple frock, a homely apron, and clumsy, 
 thick-soled shoes. 
 
 8. "Why do you not join yonder group, 1 ' asked Hope, " and par- 
 take of their gayety, my pretty little girl?" "Alas!" replied she, 
 " they take no notice of me. They call me a child. But I shall soon 
 be a woman, and then I shall be so happy !" Inspired by this hope, 
 she quickened her pace, and soon was seen dancing along merrily with 
 the rest. 
 
 9. In this manner they wended their way, from nation to nation, 
 and clime to clime, until they had made the circuit of the universe. 
 Wherever they came, they found the human race, who at this time 
 were all young (it being not many years since the first creation of 
 mankind), repining at the present, and looking forward to a riper age 
 for happiness. All anticipated some future good, and Memory had 
 scarce anything to do but cast looks of reproach at her young com- 
 panion. 
 
 10. "Let us return home," said she, "to that delightful spot 
 where I first drew my breath. I long to repose among its beautiful 
 bowers ; to listen to the brooks that murmured a thousand times 
 more musically ; to the birds that sung a thousand times more sweetly ; 
 and to the echoes that were softer than any I have since heard. Ah ! 
 there is nothing on earth so enchanting as the scenes of my early 
 youth!" 
 
 PART SECOND. 
 
 1. Hope indulged himself in a sly, significant smile, and they pro- 
 ceeded on their return home. As they journeyed but slowly, many 
 years elapsed ere they approached the spot from which they had de- 
 parted. It so happened, one day, that they met an old man, bending 
 under the weight of years, and walking with trembling steps, leaning 
 on his staff. 
 
 2. Memory at once recognized him as the youth they had seen going 
 to school, on their first onset in the tour of the world. As they came 
 
 14 
 
210 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 nearer, the old man reclined on his staff, and, looking at Hope, who, 
 being immortal, was still a blithe, young boy, sighed, as if his heart 
 was breaking. " What aileth thee, old man?" asked the youth. 
 
 3. "What aileth me?" he replied, in a feeble, faltering voice. 
 "What should ail me, but old age? I have outlived my health and 
 strength ; I have survived all that was near and dear ; I have seen all 
 that I loved, or that loved me, struck down to the earth like dead 
 leaves in autumn ; and now I stand like an old tree, withering, alone 
 in the world, without roots, without branches, and without verdure. 
 I have only just enough of sensation to know that I am miserable ; 
 and the recollection of the happiness of my youthful days, when, care- 
 less, and full of blissful anticipations, I was a laughing, merry boy, 
 only adds to the miseries I now endure." 
 
 4. " Behold," said Memory, " the consequence of thy deceptions," 
 and she looked reproachfully at her companion. "Behold !" replied 
 Hope, "the deception practised by thyself. Thou persuadest him 
 that he was happy in his youth. Dost thou remember the boy we met 
 when we first set out together, who was weeping on his way to 
 school, and sighed to be a man?" Memory cast down her eyes and 
 was silent. 
 
 5. A little way onward, they came to a miserable cottage, at the 
 door of which was an aged woman, meanly clad, and shaking with 
 palsy. She sat all alone, her head resting on her bosom, and, as the 
 pair approached, vainly tried to raise it up to look at them. " Good 
 morrow, old lady, and all happiness to you," cried Hope, gayly ; and 
 the old woman thought it was a long time since she had heard such a 
 cheering salutation. 
 
 6. " Happiness !" said she, in a voice that quivered with weakness 
 and infirmity. ' ' Happiness ! I have not known it since I was a little 
 girl, without care or sorrow. Oh, I remember those delightful days, 
 when I thought of nothing but the present moment, nor cared for the 
 future or the past. When I laughed, and played, and sung, from 
 morning till night, and envied no one, and wished to be no other than 
 I was. But those happy times are passed, never to return. Oh, 
 could I but once more return to the days of my childhood !" 
 
 7. The old woman sunk back on her seat, and the tears flowed 
 
SELECTIONS FOR STUDY. 211 
 
 from her hollow eyes. Memory again reproached her companion, 
 but he only asked her if she recollected the little girl they had met a 
 long time ago, who was so miserable because she was so young? 
 Memory knew it well enough, and said not another word. 
 
 8. They now approached their home, and Memory was on tiptoe, 
 with the thought of once more enjoying the unequalled beauties of 
 those scenes from which she had been so long separated. But some- 
 how or other, it seemed that they were sadly changed. Neither the 
 grass was so green, the flowers so sweet and lovely, nor did the brooks 
 murmur, the echoes answer, nor the birds sing half so enchantingly, 
 as she remembered them in time past. 
 
 9. "Alas!" she exclaimed, "how changed is everything! I 
 alone am the same. " " Everything is the same, and thou alone art 
 changed,' 1 answered Hope. "Thou hast deceived thyself in the 
 past, just as much as I deceive others in the future." 
 
 10. "What are you disputing about?" asked an old man, whom 
 they had not observed before, though he was standing close by them. 
 "I have lived almost fourscore and ten years, and my experience 
 may, perhaps, enable me to decide between you." They told him 
 the occasion of their disagreement, and related the history of their 
 journey round the earth. 
 
 11. The old man smiled, and, for a few moments, sat buried in 
 thought. He then said to them, "I, too, have lived to see all the 
 hopes of my youth turn into shadows, clouds, and darkness, and 
 vanish into nothing. I, too, have survived my fortune, my friends, 
 my children; the hilarity of youth, and the blessing of health." 
 "And dost thou not despair?" said Memory. " No ; I have still one 
 hope left me. " " And what is that ?" " The hope of heaven !" 
 
 12. Memory turned towards Hope, threw herself into his arms, 
 which opened to receive her, and, bursting into tears, exclaimed, 
 "Forgive me, I have done thee injustice. Let us never again sepa- 
 rate from each other." "With all my heart," said Hope, and they 
 continued forever after to travel together, hand in hand, through the 
 world. — James Kirk Paulding. 
 
 THE END. 
 
' «— ' w u r r • 
 
 
 541413 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY